V] 
 
 <^ 
 
 ^3 
 
 ^ %^ ^ <w^ 
 
 ,•>' 
 
 / 
 
 7;^ 
 
 c^ 
 
 V 
 
 'W 
 
 w 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 YEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 • 56 
 
 llM 
 
 |M 
 
 3.6 
 
 EM 
 
 1 2.2 
 2.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 /. 
 
 {./ 
 
 
 
 /!/. 
 
 t^ 
 
 f/.. 
 
 
 1.25 
 
 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 
 ■^ — 
 
 
 
 5" - 
 
 
 ► 
 
 d 
 
 #> 
 
 f 
 
 ?^-tV 
 
 *% 
 
 :\ 
 
 'C^^^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^<b 
 
 V 
 
 
 o' 
 
 
 6^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 w 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S80 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 # 
 
CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
 % 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Feavures of this 
 copy which may be bibliograph.callv unique, 
 which r.nay alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 n 
 
 □ 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de csuleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 Couverture endommagee 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaur^e et/ou pelliculde 
 
 □ Cover title missing/ 
 Le tit 
 
 itre de couverture manque 
 
 □ Coloured maps/ 
 Csrtes g^ographiques en couleur 
 
 □ Coloured ink (i.e. otl- 
 Encre de couleur li.e 
 
 D 
 
 other than blue or black)/ 
 aufre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or IMustraticns/ 
 Planches ot/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Relii avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight binding may causa shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 Lareliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distorsion le long de la marge interieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte. 
 mais, lorsque cela ^tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas iti film^es. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppldmentaires: 
 
 L'Institut a microfilme le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a e*^ possible de se procurer. Las details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-^tre uniques du 
 point de vue biblior<raphique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la m^thode normale de fiimage 
 sont indiqu^s ci-dessous. 
 
 r~n Coloured pages/ 
 
 D 
 
 Pages ce couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommagees 
 
 n Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurees et/ou pellicuides 
 
 E Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages decolorees, tachetdes ou pique 
 
 piquees 
 
 □ Pages detached/ 
 Pages detachees 
 
 HShowthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 □ Quality of pri 
 Qualit^ in^ga 
 
 nt varies/ 
 n^gale de {'impression 
 
 I I Includes supplementary material/ 
 
 Comprend du materiel supplementaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Las pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure, 
 etc., cnt dtd film^es A nouveau de facon a 
 obtenir la meille'jre image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est filmd au taux de reduction indiqu^ ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 14X 18X 22X 
 
 26X 
 
 30X 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmad hare has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 New Brunswick M 
 Saint John 
 
 ^rm 
 
 L'exemplaire filmA fut reproduit grSce d la 
 g^nirositi de: 
 
 New Brunswick Museum 
 Saint John 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possibid considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning witd the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. Ail 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol —^(meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, plates, c^harts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top :o bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Lee images suivantes ont Ati reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition at 
 da la netteti de l'exemplaire film^, et en 
 conformity avec lea conditions du contrat de 
 filmaga. 
 
 Lee exemplaires originaux dont la couxerture an 
 papier est imprimie 9ont fiim^s en commen9ant 
 par le premier plat et an terminant soit par la 
 derniire page qui compc.ne une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par la second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous las autras exemplaires 
 originaux sont filmds en commenpant par la 
 premiere page qi i comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 emptreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaftra sur la 
 derniire image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 caa: le symbole — *> signifie "A SUIVRE ', le 
 symbole V signifie Tm". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 filmte i des taux de rMuction diffdrents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul cliche, il ast filmd A partir 
 da Tangle sup^rieur gaucha, de gauche d droita, 
 et de haut an bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images n^cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illuatrant la m^thode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 

 ENG 
 
 TAU 
 
 c 
 
 n 
 
 V 
 
 |3r«fifnb- 
 
 I 
 
 32, BOU" 
 
f 
 
 37:2. (0/ 
 
 Heix! 23run0l)atcfe ^cjcol Series. 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAE 
 
 AND 
 
 ANALYSIS 
 
 TAUGHT SIMULTANEOUSLY, 
 
 WITH 
 
 1 .'■ 
 
 Humer0us (£uxtmt%. 
 
 BY 
 
 J. ROBERTSON 
 
 ^nfimbcb bg tbe §aarb of ^biuEtioit for llefo ^rnnsbjith. 
 
 
 THOMAS MURBY, 
 82, BOUVERIE STEEET, FLEET STREET, E.G. 
 
 1874. 
 
I 
 
 -n 
 
 Education Office, Pkovinct: op New Brunswick, 
 FsEDBRiCTON, Nov. 24, 1871. 
 
 The Board of Education, under the authority of the Com- 
 mon Schools Acr, 1871, has prescribpii this edition of "English 
 Grammar and Analysis," as a Text Eook for use in the Schools 
 ui this province. 
 
 Theodore H. Rand, 
 
 Chief Suj^eruiUndent of Education^ 
 
 « 
 
#«**»■' 
 
 
 The dIstlnctlTO features of the present work are the following «— 
 
 1. Tlie pupil Is taught to parse ana analyse Intelligently from the 
 beginning, 
 
 2. The sentence in its simplest form is first explained, the various 
 adjuncts being afterwards graduony introduced, and the parts of 
 speech are given in the order which it has been found present* 
 fewest difficulties to ,the learner. 
 
 3. The Text and accompanying Exercises are carefully graduated, 
 the latter being chiefly taken from Standard Authors. 
 
 4. The Lessons in Analysis are so arranged that they may be 
 taken simultaneously with the Grammar, or left for a second 
 course. 
 
 k 
 
 s 
 
 \\ 
 
 5. The rules of Syntax are deduced from the various pilnciplei- 
 as they are expltOaed ; Common Brrors only being illustrated, 
 
 6. It is believed that the Exercise?, which are unusually numerous, 
 will greatly aid the learner in acquUMng a knowledge of Composition. 
 
TABLE or CONTENia 
 
 HI 
 
 Subject— Predicate 
 Noun 
 
 Person 
 
 Number 
 
 Gender 
 Object ... 
 Verb 
 
 Person 
 
 Number 
 
 Time ... 
 Adjective ... 
 
 Possessive Case , 
 
 Personal Pronouns (Simple) ... 
 
 as Subjects 
 „ Objects 
 ,, Posses^sors 
 
 t.f 
 
 ••I 
 •I* 
 
 !•• 
 
 • •• 
 Kt 
 
 • •• 
 
 • •• 
 
 • il 
 ••• 
 
 • •t 
 
 • tf 
 
 #•• 
 
 • ■t 
 
 • •• 
 ■ •I 
 »*• 
 
 • •• 
 tt« 
 
 • •• 
 *•« 
 t.r 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 17 
 
 21 
 
 21 
 
 24 
 
 27 
 
 Personal Pronouns (Compound) 31 
 
 Preposition 32 
 
 Invei'ted Sentences 36 
 
 Mood— Indicative, Imperative, 
 
 Infinitive 37 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs— Simple 
 
 Tenses 42 
 
 Defective Verbs 49 
 
 Participles so 
 
 Infinitive Mood without To 64, 69 
 Conjugations of Verbs— Com- 
 pound Tenses C5 
 
 Voice— Active 64 
 
 Passive ... , 64 
 
 Coir.pleto Verb 68 
 
 ••• 
 
 tflt 
 
 rial 
 
 71 
 73 
 76 
 79 
 91 
 93 
 94 
 
 U8e of To Be 7« 
 
 Nouns in Apposition 
 
 Adverb 
 
 Conjunction 
 
 Elliptical Sentences 
 
 Subjunctive Mood 
 
 Kelative Pronoun 
 
 Sentences and Plirases, as Sub- 
 jects and Objects 
 
 Interrogative Pronoun 
 
 Interjection 
 
 Nouns of the First and Second 
 Persons 
 
 Various Constructions 
 
 Supplement- 
 Parts of Speech 
 
 ■ English Grammar— Its Di- 
 visions 
 Letters 
 Syllables ... 
 Kinds of Nouns 
 Tables of Gender ... 
 Formation of the Piaral 
 Kinds of Adjectives 
 Plu'ases 
 
 False Syntax ... 63,70,83,116 
 
 Promisci;ous Exercises lis 
 
 Analytical Lessons 1, 7, 16, 10, 31, 
 34, 36,37, 40, 41, ;;;;], .55, 63, 68, 
 70, 75, 78, 83, 87, 89,92, SQ, 100, 
 105 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 • *• 
 
 108 
 
 104 
 107 
 
 107 
 
 108 
 
 110 
 110 
 
 111 
 
 112 
 112 
 113 
 114 
 116 
 110 
 
 1. ^ 
 2, 1 
 3. ] 
 
 tliinge 
 
 1 
 2: 
 
 Ex.- 
 
 4. ^ 
 
 6. ^ 
 
 Predic 
 
 Ex.- 
 
 
 Wri 
 examp^ 
 
 Note. 
 for three 
 piece of 
 however, 
 the teaci 
 
 Trees 
 fell. Ei' 
 
ENGLISH GRAMMAR Am ANALYSIS. 
 
 rioa 
 
 ••■ 
 
 , 71 
 
 ••■ 
 
 73 
 
 ••• 
 
 76 
 
 ••■ 
 
 79 
 
 •tl 
 
 91 
 
 • •« 
 
 93 
 
 • ft 
 
 94 
 
 S Sub- 
 
 
 ... 
 
 103 
 
 ••• 
 
 104 
 
 • •a 
 
 107 
 
 ccoud 
 
 
 '*•• 
 
 107 
 
 tai 
 
 108 
 
 
 110 
 
 td dI- 
 
 
 • •• 
 
 110 
 
 • <• 
 
 111 
 
 ■ •« 
 
 112 
 
 • •• 
 
 112 
 
 
 113 
 
 :ral ' 
 
 114 
 
 • t * 
 
 116 
 
 • • • 
 
 110 
 
 0,83, 
 
 116 
 
 • • ( 
 
 118 
 
 16> 10, 
 
 31, 
 
 5, C3, 
 
 C8. 
 
 J, 96, loo; 
 
 «>t 
 
 SUBJECT— PEEDICATE. 
 
 1. Whatever we think is called a Thought. 
 
 8. A thought, put into words, forms a Sentence. 
 
 3. In every sentence there must at least be two 
 things : — 
 
 1st. What is spoken about. 
 2ud. What is said about it 
 
 Ex.--Biras fly. 
 
 What is spoken about in that sentence ? 
 What is said about them ? Fly. 
 
 Birds* 
 
 4. What is spoken about is called the Subject. 
 
 6. What is said about the subject is called the 
 Predicate. 
 
 Ex. — Girl sings. 
 
 What is spoken about ? Oirl. 
 Girl then is called the Subject. 
 What is said about {jirl ? Sings. 
 Sings is called the Predicate. 
 
 Write the following exercise according to the 
 example given ;— 
 
 Ex.— Girl I Subject. 
 Sings I Predicate. 
 Note.— Each exercise throughout the book is intended to serve 
 for three, four, or more Home Exercises, so as to allow each little 
 piece of new matter to be thoroughly acquired. The exerci'^es 
 however, may be done orally at first,' according to the option of 
 the teacher. 
 
 Exercise 1. 
 
 Trees_ gi-ow. Sun rises. Thomas writes. Kettle sirgs. Snow 
 fell. Rivers low. Stars twinkle. Chimney smokes. Horse 
 
 B 
 
 I 
 
2 
 
 ENGLISH ORAMMAli AKB AJfALTSIS. 
 
 blew Wa£ L r'- ^P-^''^^''-? ^'^^y'"'^- ^^"-^ l>""iecL Winds 
 Serfired M^'f; ^^''^''T^' Boy sang. Waves dash. Sol- 
 
 S fltL« T'' .^T'^'^'' ^^°" ''^^''^' Caunuii burst, 
 irainetarts. Shoe pmclies. Hedges blossomed. 
 
 THE NOFN. 
 e. Everything that we see, hear, smell, taste etc 
 
 T« *i ^^ — Leaves fall. 
 
 Is there any name in that sentence ? Yes ; leaves. 
 
 tehees!* ''''* '''' """"^^ *^^ ''^'^^' ^^ *^^ following sen- 
 
 Exercise 2 
 
 leaves. Lady eines En™3 ^ S°T ^^^OP" Steamer 
 
 weeps. Cffitr£es''°i'„§' g^vtns""' tZ "aT""- 'T'' 
 frightened. Sheet) di^rl Rtl,S.J ^ ^"J^"® adorns. Noise 
 
 Father arrived. Bells rL Bi^ k'T^' r?'""''^^ commands, 
 .ondemner boor opened.* ^^^^ ^^^^^- House stands. Guilt 
 
 7. The ncme of anything is caUed a Noun. 
 
 What IS the name of this? Book. 
 
 What IS the word booJc therefore ? A noun. 
 
 Method to be followed by pupil in doing Exercise 3. 
 
 Ex.~Leaves fall. 
 Leaves I A noun, subject, 
 laii I predicate. 
 
 ■pml^'ffnf, "'■f ^«"»«««''» to ie mvariabh 
 S 7 '^.r teacher, at each Hep throuahout th, 
 booh, wlen the pttpilis parsing. ""rougnout the 
 
 -%^. t.e v^:^^^^t^^.;^-sx, 
 
THE NOUN. 
 
 8 
 
 ed. Wiada 
 clash. Sol- 
 lUQU burst. 
 
 iste, etc., 
 London^ 
 
 }e8. 
 
 rmg sen- 
 
 withered. 
 Steamer 
 i. James 
 s. Noise 
 )mmand&. 
 In, Guilt 
 
 What is spoken about in that f5cntouce ? Lcavet* 
 What is said about lc(^vc.8f Fall. 
 
 Why is leaves a noun ? Encauso it is the name of something. 
 Why is it called subject ? Because it is what is spoken about. 
 Why iij fall called the predicate ? Because it is what in said 
 about the subject, leaves. 
 
 Exercise 3. 
 
 Picture hangs. Child dances. Lambs bleat. Doctor attended. 
 Servant assisted. Aun'i arrived. Prisoner dreams. William es- 
 caped. Woman begged. Lark sings. Apples grew. Barrel 
 burst. Postman knocks. Grocer bought. Book amuses. Friend 
 died. Fingers feel. Eyes glance. Angel appeared. Paul tra- 
 velled. Soldier marches. Smoke curled. Supper waits. Moun- 
 tains rise. 
 
 PERSON OF NOUNS. 
 
 9r Three Persona are used in parsing, and theso 
 are called respectively, the first, second, and third. 
 
 10. Nouns are generally, though not al¥;ayg ' " 
 to be of the third Person. 
 
 Ex. — Brother reads. 
 
 Brother 
 reads 
 
 a noun of the third person {why?), Bubjec. 
 predicate. 
 
 Tcise 3. 
 
 mably 
 ut the 
 
 e to be 
 epeated 
 )uld be 
 
 Exercise 4, 
 
 Mouse nibbles. Rain poured. Chain binds. Cat scratched. 
 Cock crows. Silver melted. Shilling disappeared. Thunder 
 pealed. Parrot talks. John thinks. Bees hum. Robbers at- 
 tacked. Carriage passes. King rules. Peace returned. Maiden 
 prays. Daughter knits. Organ sounded. Year begins. Hail 
 curled. Day dawns. Heart beats. Milkmaid sung. Vice 
 debases. 
 
 THE NUMBER OP NOUNS. 
 
 11. What is the difference in meaning between loole 
 
 and loohs ? Booh signifies just one bock ; hoolcs means 
 
 Quore than one. » 
 
 How «many are meant by houses ? More than one. 
 Howmany is meant by maw/ Jiwt one. 
 
 ■n O 
 
 Jf Si 
 
 I 
 
\ 
 
 f 
 
 4 
 
 ENGLISH anAMMAR AND ANALISIS. 
 
 Tell whether each of the following words means one 
 thing or more than one :— 
 
 Sxercise 5. 
 
 If nnnrlf 'Z"^?' ^?''''^\ ^""^^^ '^''^^' «to»e3, Children, hero.Unes 
 peargarde^^^^ ' ' '''''''' "^'"' ^''''^ ^''''' ^^««^' ^^ttle,' 
 
 hfi^t-r,^,^^'' * wi.''^'''^ ""^^^^ ^^^y ^^^' i* i« said to 
 a^idW Piur^'" ^^ "^^^^ ^^^'^ *^- -^' ^* - 
 This is called the Number of the noun * 
 Vt what number is each >f the following nouns ? 
 
 Exercise 6. > 
 
 Bcissors (no sing.), ' ^"^' ®P°°°' ^o^rs, 
 
 Ex :— Boys climb. (See No. 8.) 
 
 Exercise 7. 
 
 THE GENDER OP NOUNS. 
 
 *i ^^ilyr^"^^^'^ ^^^^^^ creatures there are two sexes 
 the Male Sex and the Female S'- ' 
 
 belolv'r^* '""^ ''''^ ^^"^ ^'''''°''' °'' ^"'^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 * For the Formation of the Plural rpr Nn 9^7 Aa +i,« 
 
 ■'^ 
 
3. 
 
 neaus one 
 
 hero, kings, 
 ooscberries, 
 ioel, bottle, 
 
 is said to 
 one, it is 
 
 ; nouns ? 
 
 iper, gold, 
 
 ey, knives, 
 
 bookcase, 
 
 )n, floors, 
 
 THE NOUN. 9 
 
 Exercise 8. 
 
 Boy, lady, brother, horse, father, .langhter, tinde. qnetn, 
 Boldier, mistress. Bister, raare, bull, madam, baroa, landlord, 
 countess, prince, abbot, peacock, cow, tigress, widow, earl, 
 poetess. 
 
 14. All nouTiFi applied to males, are said to bo Ivlas- 
 culine in gender.* All nouns applied to females, 
 are said to be Feminine in ^render. 
 
 Of what gender is each oi the following words ? 
 
 Exercise 9. 
 -Won, husi nd, girl, cow, duchess, wife, grandfather, sailor, 
 Wide, prmcoii^, heireas., governor, widov r, heroine, landlady, 
 belle, heir, her , man, aunt, woman, bachelor, maid, BongstT-ess, 
 soldier, waitress, master. 
 
 Gender i;i the Distinction of Sex. 
 
 ibjecc. 
 
 ks quack, 
 es. Men 
 1. Bears 
 3S. Coat 
 Is. Gon- 
 :en feed^ 
 
 > sexes, 
 
 named 
 i 
 
 As the 
 is much 
 
 Et.— Queen teigna. 
 
 Queen I a noun, 3rd pers., sing., fem. {why?), flubj, 
 
 roigns j predicate. 
 
 Exercise 10. 
 
 Mother nurses. Coachman rides. Boys jump. Uncle visited. 
 Mare canters. Peter recited. Girls skip. Sister laughed. 
 Milliners stitch. Isabella attended. Lawyer pleaded. David 
 wrote. Absalom rev >lted. Lady approached. Lioness watched. 
 Prince spoke. Horse drags. Jane writes- Samuel judged 
 Husband entered. Chairman addressed. She-goat browsed. 
 Painter travels. Marchioness bowed. 
 
 15. Of what sea^ is a house ? It is not male, and it 
 is not female. It has no sex, as it is not a liviiig 
 creature ; so we say that the word, or noun, house ia 
 . neither masculine nor feminine in gender, 
 
 * For Tables of Gendei, see No. 236. They may be learned 
 at this stage, but are not absolutely necessary. 
 
I 
 
 e 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 li 
 
 Tree 
 
 shakes 
 
 Ex. — Tree eliakeis. 
 a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neither masouKno nor 
 
 feminine, subj. 
 predicate. 
 
 r,AUi??*~^? ^"^^^"^"j ^''^ '^''''^ ^^ speaking, the word neither (or 
 neith.) may be used for '' neither masculine nor femin-'ne "as •-- 
 Tree, a noun, 8rd pers., sing., neith., subj. * 
 The word neuter is also used. '' 
 
 Exercise 11. 
 
 Bottle broke. House totters. Mirror reflects. Sun sets 
 
 ^r^i^^ ""n^'^'f' T^' superintends. Candle flickersT Poet 
 praised. ^ Countess dresses. Smoke ascends. Hand held 
 Clerk copied. Landlord sold. Ship struck. Manservant attends 
 Cxlasgow flourishes. Maidservant sweeps. Street ends Roo 
 sloped. P ant blossomed. Battle begins. Bridge stretched 
 
 K'CS- ^s.^: ^^"^ »"- 0^1- -nil: 
 
 Ex.— Servant washes. (See No. 8 j 
 
 Exorcise 12 
 
 oess arrived. Sorro/Cifles Lami, S """•'^''If'l. Prin- 
 
 . Of what gender therefore ia the word parents ? It 
 IS both masculine and feminiue ^ parencs f it 
 
 li JamSS.""^'* "'^' ^^ " »°"''™"-° '« ■' ''-'X ma«c«. 
 "i?«V"™ .~.'? «""'^' '^ °f'^° 8iv.-n to nouns that Me 
 
 ''kai 
 
THE OBJECT. 
 
 uHne &or 
 
 i neither (or 
 r:ne,"as:— 
 
 Stm getd. 
 kers: Poet 
 land held, 
 mt attends, 
 nds. Roof 
 
 stretched. 
 1 sounded. 
 
 is either 
 
 t? It is 
 
 a contrao- 
 
 mbj. 
 
 tesg stood. 
 Jd. Prin- 
 n sjmpa- 
 Guardian 
 illar siip- 
 oxes coa- 
 rps. 
 
 3oth the 
 Its? It 
 
 h mascu- 
 that are 
 
 Ex.— Parents protect. (See No. 8.) 
 Parents a noun, 3rd pers., plu., both, subj. 
 protect predicate. 
 
 Exercise 13. 
 
 Birds build. Eagles swoop, ^i'riends assembled. Children 
 played. Servants cooked. Schoolmates grieved. Knives disap- 
 peared. Foot slipped. Mary repented. Laundress starches. 
 Peacock screamed. Authoress died. Mountam towered. Eve- 
 ning approachea. Monarchs trembled. Listeners departed. 
 Blossoms appear. Crowd {neith.) dispersed. Streams mingle. 
 Steamboat left. Winds whistle. Sheep perished. Branches 
 waved. . 
 
 THE OBJECT. 
 
 18. Ex. — 1. Birds build nests. 
 
 2. Man shot birds. 
 
 Ih the first sentence, What is spoken about ? Birdi. 
 
 What is said about them ? Build. 
 "What do they build ? Nests. 
 
 The word nests is what is acted upon by the birds, 
 and hence is called the Object. 
 
 19. The Object in a sentence is whatever is acted 
 
 upon. . „ , -, 7 . J • -p 
 
 What is the difference between birds m Ex. 1, and birds m hx. 
 
 2 ? In 1 it is what is spoken about, or Subject. In 2 it is what 
 
 is acted upon, or Object. 
 
 Arrange the following sentences, thus :■ 
 
 Subject, 
 Birds 
 
 Predicate, 
 build 
 
 Object, 
 nests 
 
 I build I 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 Snow covered fields. James cut fingers. Sun lights earth. 
 Sailor climbed rigging. Box contained toys. Fire destroyed 
 warehouse. Boys broke window. George blotted copy-book. 
 Pilot steered steamer. Boiler holds water. Lions eat flesh. 
 Sparrow picked crumbs. 
 Parse the following sentences thus :— 
 
 Ex. — Snow covered fields. (See No. 8.) 
 Snow a noun, 3rd pers., sing., ueiih., subj. 
 covered predicate, 
 fields 1 a noun, 3rd pers., phi., neith., obj. {ivky ?). 
 
W EN&LISIT OllAMMAR ANJ> A^AfALYSig. 
 
 Exercise 15. 
 
 ^^^tS^^^ol^::^^^^y. ^^-. contain, .il.. 
 
 Smith makes plouRhr PoSn i! w w°"^^ ^^^^^^^^ stag, 
 children. RiRhtSL/..!u. T"^^ ^'^^'''' ^^^ents love 
 boys. Priestfss sTd pTa/e^ 'Uu^^^^^^^^^ ^«g^'^«^« 
 
 conceal moon. River overflowpdh.T ^^^^f F^'^^^' Clo"<5s 
 Mamma sends com^iments H.nrv .^^''^ ^'^P« ^'^°^'^- 
 opened gate. Gardenernrnts c^hhL "''"'^ '^'''^'^- ^^^'^^^ 
 made bowl. ^"'^^"^^^ P^^^ts cabbages. Axe cut tree. Potter 
 
 For tho Jcinds of nounq «ao Tnt^ nor mi 
 
 Sir '- *^'^-"p"^^'^^aLt.4tp.e^tn^ 
 
 CASE. 
 
 20. The state in whioli fliA nr>T.« ,•-. • jt 
 is called Casa Tf V/^?^^/^^e noun is m the sentence 
 natfve Case Tf^> • i« the subject it is called Nomi- 
 native Case. If ^t is the object it is called Objective 
 
 T, T •^^" — Baker sells bisonifa 
 
 Repeat Exercise 15. 
 
 THE VEEB. 
 
 Ex, — G-lrl broke jug. 
 Wliat did the girl do ? :Bro7ce. 
 
 is I.M SS! '^"^ "^ "'^* ^^^ ^^^ ^'^ ^-^^- ^roJ. 
 
 ^Uti^tT " *'^ "^^^ ^^ *^^ --*-- that tells 
 
 Girl 
 
 broke 
 
 jug 
 
 a uoun, 8rd pers., sing., ueith., obj. or objeotiyo case. 
 Exercise 16 
 
 %|hrofessor 
 )veied w 
 
 3gypt« : 
 
 roops. 
 
 :l 22. s 
 Ibe in tl 
 
 23. ^ 
 
 person, 
 
 leaker 
 iells 
 lliscmts : 
 
 Joiner 
 
 Beats. I'. 
 
 repaired 
 
 gi-asps si 
 
 connect 
 
 country. 
 
 Cleanhne 
 
 24. I 
 
 If the g 
 
 Soldiers 
 
 gained 
 
 victory 
 
 Tempei 
 tacked g 
 Slodge. S 
 Eagle seii 
 'TravellerE 
 t'rogs lea] 
 #dvanced. 
 
 25. S^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 iominat 
 
THE VEEB. 
 
 9 
 
 5ntains milk, 
 ollowed stag. 
 Parents lovo 
 ^d disgraces 
 ity. Clouds 
 ;eepa books. 
 ise. Porter 
 ree. Potter 
 
 5. They 
 to prevent 
 
 sentence 
 ed Nomi- 
 Objective 
 
 case, 
 ase. 
 
 lat tells 
 
 ive case, 
 case. 
 
 rofessor gave lecture. Paintings adorn gallery. Columbus dis- 
 )veied America. Johnson compiled dictionary. Nile waters 
 
 Sgypt. De Foe wrote Robinson Crusoe. Elizabeth harangues 
 
 roops. 
 
 i 22. Syntax.— Kulei— The subject of the verb must 
 i>e in the nominative case. 
 
 23. When the subject in a sentence is of the third 
 person, the verb is also said to be third person. 
 
 Ex. — Baker sells biscuits. 
 Jaker 
 
 ells 
 liscuits 
 
 a noTin, 3rd pers., sing., masc, subj. or nom. (Rule I.) 
 
 a verb, 3rd pers. {wimj ?). 
 
 a n&an, 3rd pers., plu., neith., obj. 
 
 Exercise 17. 
 
 Joiner saws wood. Sister loves flowers. Strangers rented 
 Beats. Merchant bought estate. Friends remain. Mechanic 
 .repaired engine. Band performs. Miller grinds wheat. Hand 
 5^asps sword. Fountains play. Bridge spans river. Canals 
 Iconnect seas. Truthfulness crea^^d respect. Snakes infest 
 Jfcountry. Lighthouse warned vessels. Kindness begets love. 
 €)leanliness lessens disease. 
 
 . 24. If the subject is singular, the verb is singular. 
 If the subject is plural, the verb is plural. 
 
 Ex. — Soldiers gained victory. 
 
 poldiers 
 
 gained 
 
 Victory 
 
 a noun, 3rd pers., plu., masc, nom, to gained. (Rule I.) 
 a verb, 3rd pers., plural (why?), 
 a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., obj. 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 
 Tempest swept coast. Poet published volume. Sailors at- 
 |acked garrison. Paul preached sermons. Wolves pursued 
 Ijodge. Shepherdess tends sheep. Wellington defeated Napoleon. 
 Lagle seized rabbit. Hunters followed fox. Wars impoverish, 
 travellers slept. Congregation sang psalms. Wa\es rippled.* 
 Frogs leap. Dinner waits. Story entertained. Army (neith.) 
 Idvanced. ^ 
 
 . Solo- 
 l parcel 
 
 25. Syntax.~Ilule II.— A verb must agrey with its 
 bminative or subject in number and person. 
 
10 
 
 mOLlBU OIUMMAB AM) AlfALISIB. 
 
 Scholar 
 
 forgot 
 bools 
 
 presses that it rlnp« «^ • 1 ^ Sunrises ex- 
 
 and^«52f. F^tJbses tnat the rising is over 
 
 Ex — Scholar forgot book 
 
 a lonn ^oAp^'^- ei^gMPast time (why 0. mnle IT ^ 
 a noun, 3id pers., sing., neith., obj "^ ^ "*' 
 
 a , Exercise 19. 
 
 Ete Sluggard loses... 
 
 Butcher sells beef. Oaptairboulht vacM % ^'^^^ ^"* ^^g^' 
 fled. Eire toasted bread. Clock str^.a^^^^^^ Thieves 
 
 tects garden. Eliza played piano Ifi* ^^^M'.°"^' Wall pro- 
 brings oranges. Aunt o/cupirarm-ch^r' 'T^ "^'■^^"*- ^^P^ 
 Wind raises waves. Bishop visS rs-t -^^S*' P^'^^^^^^ ''^^auty. 
 cbapel Titus destroyed Xmsaletr^' ^^^ocession entered 
 Columbus set sail. James rode W AlS'^V ^^^^ P^'^^^rs. 
 
 neaith. Bnde kissed goblet "'"^*'"^"- -iemperanco preserves 
 
 Arrange Ex. 19 ia the «aae way a. Ex. 14 
 
 orlJ; K;TSret;.T f-* f^t'^em, i„ 
 verb,; a., Robert .w/tTble """"'^ ^"'"^"i^* 
 
 aJ:M';i^^^^^^^^^^ ^^ f er the., 
 
 n^;?5. ^^"^ • ^3 James ^/ee^s,. D^g 
 
 ob.StKr''^''™-^-»««voverb3 
 Repeat Eiercise 19. 
 
 gcyern the 
 
 ftence 
 
 32. 
 
ffllS. 
 
 THE ADJECTIYE. 
 
 11 
 
 ing between 
 
 Sun rises ex- 
 
 tlie present 
 
 sing is over 
 
 second ex- 
 
 I'l or nom. to 
 y?). (Rule II.) 
 
 ^rd loses time. 
 cis cut finger, 
 ept. Thieves 
 ie. Wall pro- 
 -boat. Papa 
 aised beauty, 
 ision entered 
 >ad3 prayers, 
 ivept. Train 
 ICO preserves 
 
 L4. 
 
 •them, in 
 rransitive I 
 
 ter them, B 
 ^psi Dog 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 ^9. An adjective is a word in a sentence which tells 
 some quality of the noun or distinguishes it j as, 
 Clever girls ; Good shepherd. 
 
 What kind of girls ? Clever, Therefore clever is an adjective. 
 What kind of she^pherds? Good, Good is called an adjective. 
 
 30. An adjective may be placed before the sub- 
 ject, to tell some quality of it. 
 
 31. ]\Zethod of oral examination for eyery sen- 
 tence ;-^ 
 
 Ex. — Young child loves mother. 
 What is spcken about ? Child, 
 What kind ot <*,hilu ? Young. 
 What is said ab.nut cliild ? Loves* 
 What does it love ? Mother. 
 
 Ex. parsed :— 
 
 Young an adj. qualifying child. 
 
 child a noun, Srdpers., sing., eith. , eubj. or nom. (laile I.) 
 loves a trans, verb, 3rd. pers., sing., pres. tirue. (Euib IT.) 
 
 mother [ a noun, 3d. pers., sing., fern., obj. (Kulo III.) 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 Friend brought toys. Kind friend brought toys. Lad please* 
 master. Smart lad pleased master. Leaves cover trees. Green 
 leaves cover trees. Lazy boy lost place. Beautiful birds inhabit 
 forests. Cruel children killed butterflies. Pretty flowers filled 
 vase. Strong sailors turn wheel. Brave Wallace defended Scotland. 
 Neat church crowned hill. Clieerful faces surround table. Old 
 sexton tolled bell. Cunning fox stole hens. Swift steamer leaves 
 wharf. Plump dairymaid made cheeses. Busy bees gather honey. 
 Beloved father dies. Patient nurse watches. Bold soldier saved 
 comrade. Gentle Agnes grieves. Wet weather comes. Intelligent 
 artisan exhibited elall. 
 
 cyern the 
 
 32. Syntax. — Rule IV. — Adjectives qualify nouns. 
 
 33. An adjective may likewise be placed before the 
 object. 
 
12 
 
 ENGLISH GBAMMAE AlTD ANALYSIS. 
 
 Exercise 21. 
 
 shildren. Christ blessed little children. Wasps sting boys. Wasps 
 Bting meddlesome boys. Summer brings bright days. Grand- 
 mother hkes good tea. Stranger showed great kindness. Porter 
 carries heavy load. Huntsman has spirited horse. Squirrel as- 
 
 tZfiflA'"' ^^^f«^ept fertile plain. Travellers encoun- 
 tered great dangers. Moses plagusd Egyptian king. 
 
 34 An adjective may be placed before both subject 
 and object m the same sentence. 
 
 Exercise 22. (See 31.) 
 
 cjfS'? g°* slate. Clever girl got slate. Clever girl got new slate. 
 Strokes fell oaks. Little strokes fell great oaks. Kindly words 
 coo anger. ^ Mevvj hearts have smiling faces. Idle hands work 
 much mischief. Industrious gardener collected ripe pears. Vl 
 versity tries true friends. Creeping ivy covers ruined Jastle. Rich 
 for ner sows best seed. Cautious merchant does great business 
 Noble deeds show noble minds. Careful secretary wrote co?rec 
 account Greatest crowds followed standard. Sadder circum 
 stances befel John. Wisest men have better methods Ses 
 overhauled Portuguese ship. -tuaies 
 
 35. Two or more adjectiyes may be prefixed to 
 either subject or object, or to both at once. 
 
 Exercise 23. 
 
 Gentleman uses staff. Frail, old gentleman uses staff. Day sue 
 
 cceded niglit Calm clear day succeeded stormy night. Loud 
 
 shril noise start ed sleepers. Garden contained fine, r;d roses 
 
 Pupil makes bold, round letters. SkUful doctor treated severe 
 
 dangerous disease. Fierce tiger gave loud, dying yell Good 
 
 round, soft coal makes warm, bright, cheerful fiJerS^eep. b^oad 
 
 sluggish stream en ers restless, heaving Atlantic Ocean. Hea^est 
 
 ball penetrated thickest wall. Eager tourists see dim disTant 
 
 mountains. Faithful, enduring camel traverses burm^'g Sy 
 
 desert. Sorrowing mother bewails dear, loved son. Sp food 
 
 follows plentiful harvest. Brazen trumpet gives agreeaWe mu 
 
 sical sound. Guilty, wicked creature occupied dS.v S .^.T^ 
 
 cell. Fair, proud Mary gave long, last glance. "'' fe"pier"dava 
 
 came. Hohest joy filled breast. Mountainous district have wet^^^ 
 
 weather. George visited Spanish rivers. "'"'"^^^ ^^^« ^««e» 
 
 86. I 
 
 \)lural i 
 
 before 
 
 They 1 
 
 Disting 
 
 That 
 
 fiweet 
 musi( 
 
 charme 
 
 the 
 ear 
 
 
 m 
 
 Pillar 
 chain fa 
 old law 
 lightnin 
 ploughu 
 ■ the swa] 
 . Ilorsem 
 rented t 
 brought 
 laboure] 
 sang so 
 TLe tut 
 bad woi 
 liumilit; 
 Btory. 
 
 37. 
 
 Imndn 
 are ad 
 
 38.' 
 
 etc., a: 
 
 39. 
 
 everi/f 
 tity. 
 
318. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 13 
 
 Dhrist blessed 
 »boyfl. Wasps 
 iays. Grand- 
 iness. Porter 
 Squirrel as- 
 ellers encoun- 
 
 oth subject 
 
 ?ot new slate. 
 Kindly words 
 e hands work 
 5 pears. Ad- 
 i castle. Rich 
 ^eat business, 
 rvrote correct 
 dder circum- 
 )ds. Pii'ates 
 
 refixed to 
 
 iff. Day suc- 
 ght. Loud, 
 3, red roses, 
 sated severe, 
 yell. Good 
 )eep, broad, 
 n. Heaviest 
 lim, distant 
 'ning sandy 
 Cheap food 
 eeable, mu- 
 ark. iiRTTTi'^ 
 ippier days 
 have wetter 
 
 36. As the words a, an, tie, tJiis plural thjse, that 
 plural those, and yon, qualify or distinguisli the nouns 
 before whicli they are placed, they are adjectives. 
 They have received the n^m^ of Demonstrative or 
 Distinguishing Adjectives. 
 
 Ex.— That sweet music cuai'iaed the ear. 
 That a distinguishing adjective, voiuting out music, (Rule 
 
 IV.) 
 fiweet an adj;, qual. music, (Rule IV.) 
 musio a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., Bubj. or nom. 
 (Rule I.) 
 charmed a trans, verb, 3rd pers., sing., past time, agreeing 
 with music. (Rule II.) 
 the a dist. adj., pointing out ear. (Rule IV.) 
 ear a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., obj., by charmed. 
 (Rule III.) 
 
 Exercise 24. 
 
 Pillar supports house. The pillar supports the house. 
 
 cham fastens the gate. That woman desires this cottage. 
 
 old law remains. The active carter left this brown parcel. 
 
 lightning struck you tree. The pleasant evenings pass, 
 [ploughman tills the rough, uncultivated soil. Summer brings 
 ^ the swallow. The hardy mariner crossed the wild, stormy sea. 
 
 Horseman arrived. A horseman arrived. An owl screams. Charles 
 ^ rented that liouse. Margaret washes this room. The next mail 
 i brought more news. These curtains cover the window. Those 
 
 labourers finished dirty, wet, wearisome work. A nightingale 
 I sang some sweet notes. The bachelor bought these ornaments. 
 
 Tl e tutor teaches those boys. The bravest hero received some 
 
 bad wounds. That publisher issues this monthly journal. Great 
 
 humility distinguishes this priest. Yon stranger told an Irish 
 
 story. 
 
 37. All the Cardinal numbers, one, two, three, forty, 
 Jmndred, thousand, etc., or, 1, 2, 3, 40, 100, 1000, etc., 
 are adjectives of Clu£intity or Numeral adjectives. 
 
 38. The Ordinal numbers, Jlrst, second, third, tenth, 
 etc., are also adjectives of quantity. 
 
 39. All, some, any, no, none, loth, many, fciv, each, 
 every, either, neither, several, are adjectives of quan- 
 tity. 
 
 This 
 The 
 The 
 The 
 
14 
 
 The 
 
 first 
 
 officer 
 
 captured 
 
 ten 
 men 
 
 ENGLISH OEAMMAB AKD AKALTSX8. 
 
 Ex.— The first officer captured ten men, 
 a dist. adj., qual. officer. (Rule IV.) 
 * mSriv^)'^"'' ^°^^'^*'' °^ ^'^^^*^*^^' numbering oficer, 
 
 a noun, 3rd perg., sing., masc, nom. (or subj.) to 
 captured. (Rule I.) v - ; ^ 
 
 ^ tT' r'^' ^/i? ,P'.'?'J '^°S" P^«* *i^e, agreeing 
 with officer. (Rule II.) ^ 
 
 a num. adj., numb. men. (Rule IV.) 
 
 ^ (Rde 11?)^ ^^''^'' ^^"'' ^^^^'* ^^J" '^y '^'^i'^W'*^^- 
 
 Exercise 25,* 
 
 IioST^^^^^^^' T^^^'^^s passed. Horses drew wagon. Six 
 horses drew wagon. The form held twelve girls. The enemv 
 left many guns. Every sailor knows duty. The glorio s ZZj 
 Th« w£ * ^^^T^ ^^"- , ?^^ glorious Victory cost 8000 men 
 grand army. The fire destroyed ninety houses. Uncle has four 
 
 m^'cteJt f ''' 'f '" l''"" ^"-"^'^^^^- E^^ 'y tenth s^S 
 annonnJ!«lw ^•Tri^'!l*''^^'' ^^" ^^^««1^«- ^ newspaper 
 SriftOnnf-'^^^^f^^^^^^^^ Robert read 340 pages. Glasgow 
 conta ns 480,000 mhabitants. Tom sent another man The 
 
 E o.'."^:-^'' ^-^^^ '''''^'''- ^^^ ^'^"^ ^°^^ted neither horse 
 danLr^ Th"';^/?' '^^iS'J^- ?^^* precaution prevents any 
 danger. The butcher sold tne whole ox. The Greek merchant 
 lost some money. The firm imports French wTnes. 
 
 40. Some nouns, when placed before other nouns to 
 express a quality of them, are used as adjectives. 
 
 Ex. — Iron ring. 
 What kind of ring ? Iron. 
 Iron is a noun used as an adjective. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 
 A pin holds the shawl. A silver nin ho]d«i the, ei.orni t i, 
 has » ponoil-caBe. John has a goll pond tS Tl" 'servatt 
 broke Iho chma cup. Children blow soap bubbles. The Sace 
 
 c...oexi.„ij.cr icpiviiuci the ieaiuer boots. 
 
 *For all the kinds of adiectives spa Nn 9Qa t* • 
 necessary to take them up furtUlmVafnu^^ert^ 
 
 41. 1 
 
 IPay ge 
 
 This 
 • Ther< 
 Jositive 
 : The 
 »fifi, grt 
 
 The ( 
 
 % the ] 
 
 :: The I 
 
 kt to tl 
 
 Telli 
 
 Sma 
 
 Happie 
 grain. G 
 greenest | 
 people. 
 <K>ld nigl 
 Sorest ne 
 
 41a. : 
 
 Quantil 
 tivcs, 5^ 
 as, almi 
 %, Em 
 
 Adjec 
 ensily p 
 
 general] 
 1 ' -^ , 
 
 * The 
 
 mi aUqx t 
 
'SIS. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 15 
 
 3n. 
 
 mbering ofjicef, 
 I. (or BubJ.) to 
 time, agreeing 
 
 ., by captured. 
 
 w wagon. Six 
 The enemy 
 lorious victory 
 st 8000 men. 
 nperor led the 
 hide has four 
 'f tenth soldier 
 A newspaper 
 jes. Glasgow 
 r man. The 
 neither horse, 
 prevents any 
 Jek merchant 
 
 er nouns to 
 
 jctiyes. 
 
 hawl. John 
 The servant 
 _ The palace 
 iller wears a 
 wall. Tha 
 
 It is not 
 reaohed. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 41. The quality expressed by the simple adjective 
 
 fay generally be made greater or less : as, lon^, 
 nger, longest ; smally smaller j smallest. 
 \ This is called the Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 There are three degrees of comparison, the 
 Positive, the Comparative, and the Superlative. 
 
 The Positive degree is the simple adjective : as, 
 Bafc, great. 
 
 The Comparative degree is formed by adding r or er 
 # ^lie Positive : as, srfe, safer ; great, greater. 
 
 The Superlative degree is formed by adding st or 
 %t to the Positive : as, safe, safest ; great, greatest. 
 
 Tell the degrees of the adjectives in the following: 
 
 Ex.- -A smaller house. 
 Smaller | an adj., comp. deg., qual. Jiouse. (Rule IV.) 
 
 Exercise 27. 
 
 ^- Happier days. Finer dresses. The highest steeple. Ripe'' 
 ^ain. Good potatoes. Bad butter. The greatest la^iryer. The 
 gleenest gooseberries. Many marbles. Fewer houses. Merriest 
 J«ople. Nicest garden. Sweeter pears. The warmest fire. A 
 CK>ld night. A large orange. Clever tricks. A damp day. 
 Sorest need. An early hour. 
 
 41a. Distinguishing Adjectives and Adjectives of 
 Quantity cannot be compared. Several other adjec- 
 Mvcs, strictly s'gealdng, do not admit of comparison : 
 9^, almighty, perfect j infinite^ extreme^ square, everlast^ 
 %y, English, etc. 
 
 Adjectives of two syllables, when they are not 
 <|tsily pronounced, and those of more than two, are 
 generally compared by prefixing more and onost or less 
 ^d least : as, discreet, more discreet, most discreet. ^ 
 
 J * The Exercise on Comparison by more and most is omitted 
 Hi after the adver^ See Nos. 168, 239. 
 
 '"34^ • "iiv^,^ ^ 
 
10 
 
 ENGLISH ORAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 If the adjective end in y 'preceded ly a consonar. 
 the y is changed into i before adding er, est . as 
 happy f happier y happiest. 
 
 42. Some words have, for the Comparative and 
 Superlative, words quite diiferent from the Positive 
 This is called Irregular Comparison. 
 
 Irregular Comparison. 
 
 Positive. 
 
 
 Comparative, 
 
 Sn,]^erlative, 
 
 Good 
 
 
 better 
 
 best 
 
 Bad, evil, 
 
 ill 
 
 worse 
 
 worst 
 
 Much, many 
 
 more 
 
 most 
 
 Little 
 
 
 less 
 
 least 
 
 Nigh 
 
 
 Higher 
 
 nighest, next 
 
 Old 
 
 
 older, elder 
 
 oldest, eldest 
 
 Far 
 
 
 farther 
 
 farthest 
 
 Fore 
 
 
 former 
 
 foremost, first 
 
 Late 
 
 
 later, latter 
 
 latest, last 
 
 Hind 
 
 
 ninder 
 
 hindmost, hindcrmos\ 
 
 Compare the following adjectives lohen it is pos- 
 sible : — 
 
 Exercise 27a. 
 
 Large, dreary, kind, gentle, big, early, careful, almighty, thiu, 
 this, six, goocl, precious, beautiful, hot, old, cold, wise, delightful, 
 fat, late, little, hardy, several, sagacious, that, much, sorry, talk, 
 glad, deep, third, external, dead, keen, soft, right, eight, ill. 
 
 Parse the following sentences :— 
 
 Exercise 28. 
 
 James brought the greatest number. That rose gives a plea^ 
 sauter smell. The strangers chose the worst day. Gold has 
 harder qualities. Little troubles followed. The lawyer send* an 
 older brother. The ship sustained heavy damage. The young 
 sailor avoided the WDrst dangers. The shareholders sustained 
 hea\icr losses. The next boy takes the higher place. The travel- 
 ler spoke the last won". The poorest person received the largest 
 share. A greater wonder foiiows. Such deeds outrage the huiiesi 
 feelings. The master wanted a better man. Tlio late hour pre- 
 vonf-ed further proceeding. Little pains ' '"'ig little gains. 
 The best men die. 
 
[S. 
 
 % consonai: 
 jr, est. as 
 
 irativo and 
 :ie Positive 
 
 rlative. 
 
 tm; POBSEsaoE, on possessite cagk. 
 
 Ei— The bravest hero receiveJ Bome bad Tfounds. 
 General Analysis. 
 
 17 
 
 Subject. 
 The bravest hero 
 
 The 
 
 bravest 
 
 hero 
 received 
 
 some 
 bad 
 
 woiinda 
 
 Predicate. 
 I received 1 
 
 Particular Analysis. 
 (adj.) enlargement of subject. 
 (adj.) enlargement of subject 
 (rjoun) simple subject. 
 (verb) predicate. , , . . 
 (adj.) enlargement of object 
 
 Object. 
 Bome bad wounds. 
 
 next 1 
 
 ildest I 
 
 t, first '^ 
 
 ast 
 
 3t, hindcrmoaUJ 
 
 ^ it is ^os- 
 
 [mighty, thin, 
 ise, clolightful, § 
 h, Borry, talk, f 
 jiglit, ill. 
 
 \adj.) enlargement of object. 
 
 «„„« . ('■'""'•);;7'°f "2*2 23 25, 2G, and 28. 
 Analyse exercises 20, zi, ^z, ^o, ^u, , 
 
 both generally and particularly. 
 
 I gives a plea' 
 y. Gold has 
 wyer sendi an 
 
 The young 
 lers sustained 
 
 The travel- ^mjk 
 
 'ed tlio largest iBf 
 
 ago the huliest ' 
 
 late hour pre- 
 
 little gains. 
 
 THE POSSBSSOB, OK POSSESSIVE CASE. 
 
 43. Ex.— Peter's books. 
 
 Whose books ? Peifer'.?. , 
 
 The books belong to Feten ^^ possesses them. 
 
 Therefore Feter is called the Possessor. 
 
 PoSt out the Possessors in the following exercise : 
 
 Exercise 29. 
 
 JoWs mother. Men's ^'^^?:J%1^,- J^'t^:. tf: 
 Girl's bonnets. Bo,s' "?»f"«?.; .„ ^^s C's hole. Foxes' 
 
 "irSe l::r:Vr indicated .y the .... 
 
 called the Apostrophe. 
 
 A^i TTow to find the nu'rrl)er of the Possessor :-- , 
 I • theTart of the word before the apostrophe is 
 
 ,;. , .„i„. tl,« wli"lo word 13 Singular. It the pait oi 
 
 tlS^w^Stfore^the apostrophe is plural the wuolo 
 
 word is plural. 
 
18 
 
 E-JTOLISH »EAMMAB AITO AUAITSIB. 
 
 Ex.— Man'8 life. 
 The part before the apostrophe is man, which is Bincrlori 
 hence vian's is singular. 
 
 Ex.— Ladies' gloves. 
 The part before the apostrophe is ladies, which is plural ; henco 
 ^«die«' is plural. 
 
 Ex. The eagles' feathers adorn the hat. 
 
 The a dist. adj., pointing oxii feathers. (Rule IV.) 
 
 eagles' a noun, 3rd pers., plu. {why ?), eith. oi both, pos- 
 sessor, possessing the /<?af/icrs. . -o i t% 
 
 feathers a noun, 3rd pers , plu., neith.,nom. or subj . (Rule 1.) 
 adorn atraua. verb, 3rd pers., plu., pres. time, agr. witH 
 feathers. (Rule IL) 
 the a dist. adj. pointing out hat. (Rule IV.) 
 
 hat a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., obj., by adorn* 
 
 (Rule III.) 
 
 i 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 
 Father told story. Mary's father told story. The son watched 
 the pHot. The captain's son watched the pilot. Bonnets at- 
 tracted attention. Girls' bonnets attracted attention. The 
 tailor's coat fitted the apprentice. Nelson's sailors captured the 
 sliip. The widow's mite pleased Christ. The soldiers' general 
 received a wound. The r--»son's children drank the milk. The 
 bees' hive contains honey. Charles's clerk obeyed the orders. 
 England's ships cover all seas. The country's beauty dehghted 
 the numerouj travellers. The ladiea' visitors entered the splendid 
 room. The gardener's roses lade. That king's horse cost much 
 money. A boar's head adorned the banquet hall. The maker's 
 name satisfied the fastidious purchaser. 
 
 46. The state of ^'." ■- i, 'expressed by tlie 
 possessor, is called the Possessive Case. 
 
 47. Syntax.— Eule V.— When two nouns come to- 
 gethl;', signifying different things, the first is put in 
 the possessive case. 
 
 48. The object in a sentence may also ha^^c a 
 possessor. 
 
19 
 
 ia Bincrlor; 
 
 )liiral ; bonce 
 
 ;ule IV.) 
 
 Oi both, pos- 
 
 mbj.(RuloJ.^ 
 Dae, agr. with 
 
 j., by adorn. 
 
 ) son watched 
 Bonnets at- 
 intion. The 
 captured the 
 diers' general 
 e milk. The 
 1 the orders. 
 ,uty delighted 
 I the splendid 
 :se cost much 
 The maker's 
 
 ed by tlie 
 
 as come to- 
 3t ia put in 
 
 Iso have n 
 
 THE POSSESaOE, OB POSSESSIVE CASE. 
 
 Ex.-Jamefl got the child's book, 
 a noun. 3rd pers.. sing., masc. nom. or Bubj. to 
 
 atfans.K 3rd pers.. Bing., past time. agr. with 
 
 James. (Rule II.) ^^ v 
 
 a dist. adj. pointing out hook. (fj^YoS hook, 
 a noun, 3rd pers., emg., eith., poss., posseBbuib 
 
 . *?^:3T;lpers.,sing.,neith.,obi..by,o. (Eul.ni.) 
 
 James 
 
 got 
 
 the 
 child's 
 
 book 
 
 Exercise 31. , ^ ,. 
 
 ■ 1 .(f.M\nn The do2 gained master's affection. 
 
 The dog ^^"I'^f^fZmm^ 'Ihe loats reached the moun- 
 The goats reached the summit i^^^^ ^^^^ ^ ^ 
 
 tarn's summit, i^®. *^""^^ .^^^^^^ ^Uf, otncer's sword. The 
 birds' nests. The ^^^f ^« /f "^^^f The heaw snow destroyed 
 deliverer breaks the captives' h^ beay ,^ newspapc;^. 
 
 the shepherd's flocks. The por.er brm.g ^. J ^^ ^^^ 
 
 The keen BP^^^sman crossed the farmer s ^^^ ^^^^^^^,^ 
 
 witnessed the parents' gl^^J' ^^^^^^^^ Some boy 
 
 ascent. Great fear t'l^f,^^,^^^l',,^^^^^ the sove- 
 
 took Peter's penciL^iveh^^^^^^^ Inlands. A 
 
 Smc :t3 overLSThrchnrch's spire. Several womeu 
 
 witn-.ssed Eobert's departure. 
 
 49. There may be several possessors in the sanK? 
 sentence. ^^^^^.^^ g^^ 
 
 The boat carried the lette. T^-jX/.^^^^^^^^^^ 
 letters. The company's boat^ c^^^^^^^ Milton's 
 
 Poems gained PJ^^^' • J^V^^^^^^^ had a great fever, 
 
 poems gained the ^lation s praise, mox ^^^^^ ^^^ ^ 
 
 life's mother had a great ^^^f * ^^^^vlthe king's carriage, 
 ^reat fever. The f^i^^f ? WseTtrar^P The lawyer studied 
 The sentinel's ears H^^'^.*^,^,^°'^'SotlaS mountains n-orsed a 
 the Students' Hume's Hiftory. Scotland s mo ^^^^^,^ ^^^ 
 
 hardy race. The roses' ^P^^^^^^,';^^^^ Neighbour's 
 
 Generous doctor ^^«f ^\,*!^^S faiS^- ^^^^^^'^ ^^^S^" 
 generous doctor assisted *^f ,^*J'I'"g^tJ^ing famUy. The long 
 tour's generous doctor assisted tl^ J^a^^^^l^^^ ^^^.g directors 
 
 sermon exhausted the ^««^^jf ^Pf^^'face re^ 
 
 rejected the ^uke^B offers. The If^e s^suit^^ ^^^^,^ silvery Ught. 
 
 iicht. Tne lako s c»ii" =^r....... ---,,, u.^^jy hours, ueaxn. 
 
 tL old man's memory ■^»»"'.^'i%VuScool breezes toM 
 entered the peasant's lowly cottage. Autumuai. ^^ 
 
20 
 
 E'N-GLISII GEAMMA.11 A-N^D ANALYSIS. 
 
 the maiden's j^olden hair. The past clay's heavy rain allayed the 
 storm's resistless force. March's cold wind,? nip tho trees' early 
 buds. The monarch's eldeat sou received the father's glittering 
 crown. 
 
 50. Insert tlie apostroplie ^and tlie " s," or the 
 apostrophe, where required, in the foUowIng phrases 
 and sentences : — 
 
 Exercise 33. 
 
 Peters pen. Eagles wings. Eoberts house. Boys bag. 
 Sailors song. Mens shoes. Childrens hats. Burns monument. 
 Nelsons culumn. St. J^mes Magazine. Britains glory. Solo- 
 mons temple. He bought a captains commission. He studied 
 Moses law. We read Cnambers Journal. The carter held the 
 horse head. The princess son died. Trafalgars Bay. He got 
 the rope end. Thomas unbelief. Drydena Virgil. Caesars 
 wounds. Conscience sake. Summers evening. The suns eye 
 nad a sickly glare. 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON IV. 
 
 51. In analysis, if a possessor is joined with the 
 subject, it is called an enlargement of the s hjcct ; 
 and if joined to the object, it is called an enlarge^ 
 ment of the object. 
 
 Ex. — The lake's surface reflected the moon's light. 
 
 General Analysis. 
 Snhjeci. Predicate. Object. 
 
 The lake's surface | reflected | the moon's light. 
 
 Particular Analysis. 
 
 The {adj') enlargement of the subject. 
 
 Jake's (iwss.) enlargement of the subject, 
 
 surface (I'oun) simple subject, 
 
 reflected {verb) aimple predicate. 
 
 the (ddj.) enlargement of the object, 
 
 moon's [poss.) enlargement of the object, 
 
 light {noun) simple object. 
 
 Analyse exercises 30, 31, and 32, both generally 
 and particularly. 
 
 wrote 
 
 a 
 
 whole 
 page 
 
 In 
 
 rewar 
 Wef( 
 the s 
 caugl 
 brara 
 Lone 
 mom 
 
PEllSONAL rilOKOUlf3. 
 
 21 
 
 allayed tlio 
 trees' early 
 s glittering 
 
 ' or the 
 y phrases 
 
 Boys bag. 
 tnonument. 
 Dry. Solo- 
 He studied 
 sr held the 
 y. He got 
 1. Cseaara 
 D suns eye 
 
 with the 
 
 ST j^JGCt ; 
 
 , enlarge' 
 
 ght. 
 
 ct. 
 
 'b light. 
 
 generally 
 
 PEESONAL PEONOTJNS. 
 
 52 A Pronoun is a word used in place of a noun 
 Thu. if in tead of Baying James «^eepB, we say He 
 sleeps, /.e would be called a pronoun, smee it stands 
 for the noun James. . , . 
 
 53 Personal pronotms are those used simply m 
 place of the names of persons or things. 
 
 54 They are either simple or comimmd. _ 
 55! Simple personal pronouns are arranged in 
 
 three persons, the first, second, and third. 
 
 56 They aie all of the same number and gender 
 as the nouns in place of which they stand. 
 
 57 The simple personal pronoun of the first pMSOn 
 i, usedTn place of the name of the person who ^s 
 
 *'' st'The form it takes for the nominative ease or 
 .ubiect is I for the singular, and we for the pluial. 
 
 59. When the subject n first person the verb is 
 first person. ^^_^ ^^^^^ ^ ^^^,^ ^^„^_ 
 
 a simple personal pronoun o£ the Islpers., ring., eith., 
 
 a=;trtr;jr(:.jr^n^..p-unie.a.. 
 
 with I. (Hule Il.f 
 a dist. adj., qual. page. (^^^ f ^ J') 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 
 . -, .o,.^v IntP We held the string. I expected good 
 I made a paper ^^^ e- J « ^J^ -j ^^^^,^ the spreading oak. 
 reward. I see the ^win^ing sm «• ' ^ . j j^^^^,^ 
 
 We found a -hin's nest, ^e played an c lon^^^^g ^ 
 
 the steamer's paddle. We bun« bi« gathered ripe 
 
 caught a fine ^f '^^^%,\^^^^^^^^^ boal I learned 
 
 brambles. We launched the oLim^pc ^^^^^,^ 
 
 Lonafollow's last new V^^^^^^: J^^^^^^ 
 monument. An anxious raotLut 3 eaiuctit^-. 
 
22 
 
 EJS'GLISn OEAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 throne. This poor 'wretch destroyed a long life's labour. I 
 trembled. We rested. We ciossed the river. I completed the 
 task. 
 
 60. The simp. J personal pronouns of the second 
 person stand in place of the names of the persons to 
 whom we speak. 
 
 61. They are thou and you for the nom'native (or 
 subject) singular, and ye and you for the nominative 
 (or subject) plural. 
 
 Q2. You is either singular or plural, according to 
 the meaning. 
 
 63. When the nominative or subject is second 
 person, the verb is also second person. 
 
 Ex. — You tasted the tart. 
 You a sim. pers. pron., 2nd pers., sing, or plu., eith. or both, 
 nom. (or subj.) to taste. (Rule I.) 
 tasted a trans, verb, 2nd pers. {wluj ?) , sing, or plu., past time, 
 agr. with you. (Rule II.) 
 the a dist. adj., pointing out tart. (Rule lY.) 
 
 tart a noun,3rd pers., sing., neith.,obj.,bytasf^cZ.(Rule III.) 
 
 Exercise 35. 
 
 You ate the apple. Thou rememberest man's frailties. Thou 
 Idllest the prophets. You followed tne great crowds. I sing the 
 Creator's praise. You enjoy good health. Yf e bore all the severe 
 losses. Ye despised the apostles' warning voice. Thou feelest 
 the sword's point. You visited a northern country. I watched 
 the sinking star's last rays. Thou losest a great treasure. You 
 removed the grocer's shop's shutters. You beheld the beautiful 
 evening (40) star. Ye shine. We sowed some beans. You dis- 
 missed the careless, untrustworthy salesman. I admire the lovely 
 spring flowers. We removed the mahogany table. You invited 
 many dear friends. Thou forge ttest the commandment. Cruel, 
 inhuman pirates infest the Cliiuese seas. 
 
 64. The simple personal pronouns of the third 
 person stand in place of the names of the persons or 
 things that are spoJcen about. 
 
 65. There are three of them — He, She, It. 
 
 66. He generally takes the place of nouns applied 
 
 ||to males 
 'nominat 
 
 a 
 
 He 
 
 Bpoke 
 
 Henry 
 
 charge. 
 
 dresses. 
 
 veniences 
 
 many mc 
 
 some ris: 
 
 needest ■' 
 
 men me 
 
 account. 
 
 I respec 
 
 He finis 
 
 67. ' 
 
 person 
 applie 
 alwayi 
 They. 
 
 Mar; 
 
 She at' 
 
 , the fli 
 
 game. 
 
 yarn. 
 
 Bomt. 
 
 Capta: 
 
 niainc 
 
 She a 
 
 quest] 
 
 68 
 -It 
 
 I thin 
 . onasi 
 
PEESOKAL PEONOUKS. 
 
 28 
 
 labour. I 
 pleted the 
 
 I second 
 
 37'SOllS to 
 
 ative (or 
 minative 
 
 pding to 
 i second 
 
 h. or both, 
 past time, 
 
 [Rule III.) 
 
 )3. Thou 
 I sing the 
 the severe 
 ou feelest 
 I watched 
 are. You 
 I beautiful 
 You dis- 
 the lovely 
 DU invited 
 t. Cruel, 
 
 le third 
 i'sons or 
 
 3 applied 
 
 1 ^a fT^prpfore masculine. It is a^./aya 
 
 to spohe. (^^^^/'^^.^a Bing., past time, agr. mtl» 
 an intrans. verb, 3rd pe.9., eixxg., f 
 
 He, (Rule II.) 
 
 He 
 
 Bpoke 
 
 venienceg. He abandoned the city s ^^^^^^ j 
 
 niany more labourers You the house rent Thou 
 
 some risk. He hesitated, ia ^^^^ bouquet. The 
 
 ^''^y- Exercise 37. 
 
 , 1 ■ ™ m,o knitted iirarm stocluogs. 
 Mary toittea warm /'"'^^f "K^. She tot ea ^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 She atteuded a >>">=>«''l;/t'„e pretty flo^vers. We played one 
 tke flute. She a\™»f ^/^TJ^^Sen spin yam. They spin 
 ^ame. She wn M P»^«'- „,i^^7° The gardener's son brought 
 ?Ln. They want a y°"''84,'^!™°';ted Kafy ^ou detained the 
 l<«a. deUghttul grapes She "sited Ma J ^ ^^^^^^_ ^^^^ ^^. 
 Captain's negro servant. He despar ^ ^^^ , 
 
 ^hjXrTt^m. tin^e. you as. a better 
 
 'trTKe.™plepe.^ 
 
 masculine nor feminine m genaer. xu» i- 
 
 69. m.y, tVerefox-6 mr.y to masauliae, femmine, 
 
n 
 
 ENGLISn GRAMMAR AND ANALYSIS, 
 
 either masculine or feminine, neither masculine nor 
 feminine, or both masculine and feminine, according 
 to the gender of the noun for which it stands. 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 The loaf falls. It falls. It rained. It overturned several 
 trees. It alarmed the neighbourhood. She selected a suitable 
 occasion. It snows. It bore bad fruit. He summoned the 
 faithful minister. Philip made great preparations. Tke cardinal 
 forgot the bishop's arguments. It includes different districts. 
 It shook the throne. We seek shelter. I found relief. They 
 inhabit the rocky shore. She spoke the French language. 
 Mary's death stopped the war. The roots withered. They 
 withered. They give light. Tliey possess property. 
 
 70- II(^ and she are sometimes used in speaking of things that 
 have no sex; as, speaking of the sun, we say, *' He rises "; or, 
 of a ship, we say, " She sailed." It is often applied to things 
 which liave sex; as, spealdng of a child, we often say, "It 
 screamed." It is generally used when the sex is doubtful. This 
 licence which is taken witii these pronouns may be called Poetic 
 Gender. 
 
 TifE SIMPLE PEESONAL PEONOUNS used as 
 
 OBJECTS. 
 
 71. The simple personal pronouns which have just 
 "been treated of, have always been used as the subjects 
 of sentences. In that form they can only be used as 
 suljects. Each has a different form for the ohjecti 
 and this form can only be used as the object, and 
 never as the subject. 
 
 72. The simple personal pronoun of the 1st person. 
 Singular. Flural. 
 
 Norn, (or suhj.) I 
 Obj. Me 
 
 JVom. (or suhj.) We 
 Ohj. Us 
 
 Me is the objective corresponding to I. Us is the objective 
 corresponding to xce ; as, I addressed the man. The man 
 addressed me. We S!i.w the man. The man saw us. 
 
 He 1 ft SI 
 itruck 1 a t 
 
 me 
 
 a E 
 
 I like tb 
 
 bus. The 
 
 ; me. You 
 
 '' earnest pi 
 
 emotion. 
 
 resisted e^ 
 
 . us. The f 
 
 Smith's ■ 
 
 Btranger. 
 
 73. 'l 
 
 hear 
 
 you 
 
 Th( 
 
 pany 
 
 1 exp' 
 
 comf< 
 
 some 
 
 admi 
 
 expei 
 
 recei 
 
 you. 
 
 plaC' 
 
 •J 
 BOH 
 
PERSOKAI. PB0^0TJ58. 
 
 25 
 
 me nor 
 cording 
 
 d several 
 a suitable 
 loned the 
 6 cardinal 
 districts, 
 ef. They 
 language, 
 d. They 
 
 lings that 
 ses " ; or, 
 to things 
 say, " It 
 'ul. This 
 led Poetic 
 
 USED AS 
 
 lave just 
 I subjects 
 \ used as 
 e ohjectf 
 ject, and 
 
 ; person. 
 
 We 
 
 Us 
 
 3 objective 
 The man 
 
 
 ^e a Sim. pevs- P^n., f 
 "^^ (Rule III.) , 
 
 Exercise 39. atheomm- 
 
 Tbfi baker lilies me. vve r»* followed 
 
 emotion. We ^\^^^^^^^f^i workman mstuctedn^^^ ^^^^^ 
 resisted evil, yf^^'^d me. Scott s monui ^^^ polite 
 
 73 The simple personal pronoun ^^^^_^^ 
 O'y- , „ T hear thee- ^ou hear roe. 
 
 l^^*' " rf; I?f ' • . « Plu., o«b. or both, 
 
 (Bale ll-) 2ua pevB., sing- or P'«-' 
 
 ^»M''tbr.^T'-.e-\Bule\lI.) 
 
 Exeroiss 40. ^^^^ ^^^„„,. 
 
 ,,ny tue lady. Tb. My ^^^ general roeeutoaf^^^^^ ^^^ , 
 1 eipcctthee. 1 teboldest mo. =''»}/",|,,e,ited you. T^ou 
 comfort you. ^,5° jestroyed tbe rats. " X:"„,verea you- ^0 
 
 Sr»K&"" "Stt-He S 
 
 ^X..".b:1Sl>---'Xouou n of the 3rd pc- 
 74. Tlie simple personal pronou 
 
 son maaculme. 
 
26 
 
 ENaLISH GEAMMA.E AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 Singular. 
 Norn, {or subj.) He 
 OhJ. Him 
 
 you 
 
 told 
 him 
 
 JPlural. 
 Nom. (or subj.) They 
 Obj. Them 
 
 Ex. — You told him. 
 a aim. pers. pron., 2nd pers., sing, or plu., eith. or both, 
 
 nom. (or subj.) to told. (Rule I.) 
 a trans, verb, 2nd pers., sing, or plu., past time, agr. witii 
 
 you. (Rule II.) 
 a sim. pers. pron., 3rd pers., sing., masc, obj. by told. 
 
 (Rule III.) 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 
 He held the horse. The horse bit him. The chair supports 
 him. The small band defeated him. The nimble horse won the 
 chief race. The jailer released him. You astonish me. I re- 
 commended you. She invites us. I met them. The snow hindert 
 them. They seized him. The master's kind friends paid the 
 expenses. Jane's father told us. "We seek them. They reproach 
 them. You allowed them. She forgets the sad circumstance. 
 The peacock's feathers adorned them. The boys' bonnets suit 
 them. 
 
 75. The simple personal pronoun of the 3rd per- 
 son feminine. 
 
 Singidar. JBlural. 
 
 Nom. {or subj.) She 
 Obj. Her 
 
 I^om. {or subj.) They 
 Obj. Them 
 
 Ifo7n. {or suhi.) It 
 Obj. It 
 
 i\om. {or subj.) They 
 Obj. Them 
 
 : They prai^' 
 navigate it. 
 'rmed the b1 
 ^le hill's Bte< 
 made it. 1 
 fourth horse 
 :^he ■wiacl to 
 
 
 The si 
 
 Exercise 42. 
 
 She called me. I called her. She trusts us. We trust her. 
 The pink ribbons become her. The clever policeman traced him. 
 You learned good manners. Four Indian chiefs received me. 
 They predict a severe winter. The pet lamb follows her. It 
 sheltered her. He remembers a father's prayrr. I congratulate 
 them. They enjoy the lively game. The bold, rugged mountains 
 delight them. The pramised reward satisfied her. They charged 
 the enemy's ranks. You displeased her. He preserved her. 
 She concealed him. Some boy provoked them. 
 
 76. The simple personal pronoun of the 3rd per- 
 son, neither masculine nor feminine. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 11. Th 
 ponding 
 
 My fo^ ^ 
 book; C 
 The si 
 
 Noiin. 
 
 Obj. 
 Poss, 
 
 Postma 
 brougb 
 our 
 letter 
 
 78. 
 
 noun 
 thing 
 
 Per 
 
 Myb< 
 
M 
 
 pEESOIfiL PBOHOimS. 
 
 27 
 
 They 
 Tliem 
 
 or both, 
 agr. •with 
 . by told. 
 
 supports 
 3 won the 
 e. I re- 
 w hindert 
 
 paid the 
 f reproach 
 imstance. 
 inets 6uit 
 
 trd per- 
 
 They 
 Them 
 
 trust her. 
 aced him. 
 eived me. 
 I her. It 
 Qgratulate 
 nountaing 
 3y charged 
 irved her. 
 
 }rd per- 
 
 They 
 Them 
 
 1 Exercisers. r^ho iuha^i^on** 
 
 ^ . ;^ u We sell it. It flourished, ^ne 
 
 Thev praised it. vve sei ^g ^ore it. i-^^ b ^^^ 
 
 ^J^Jit. The governors s^^^^ '^^^^^1 u'* A^^tet 
 ixnfd the Btateinent ABOun ^^^^^ de^t^^^'^ 'erished The 
 
 iSihU'stUed. Thouseestit. 
 |he ^nnd tossed them. 
 
 [the SIHPI^^ ^^ poSSESSOBS. 
 
 . ,7 The word which denotes f/J^STer'^^^^^^^^^ 
 U'diS^t^othesi^P^^^^^^^^^^^ as, if. 
 
 »kv for the singular, ana uu 
 booli ; Ouri^om^- ^ of the Ist person. 
 
 The dmple personal pronou ^^^^^^ 
 
 Nom. Cor *»*;•) Ij^ o6j. S^ 
 
 Oq;. jfij I Posfi. 
 
 "-^^M "Pjf "(Bul/lIO ^^,., ^,„„ eith. or both, 
 
 >etter»hSxixV^'"' 
 
 , ,r wv,pntwonouii9,orapro- 
 ,8. Synta..-Kule^J--5tS%.ifyxug diiferont 
 
 Exercise 44. stoppea* 
 
 . ,.. ..^ v..ol.e. Clock stopped. Our^^^ocK^^ i,^^^ 
 Pen broke, is^y i"=V "kv box contains luj 0^.vKb« 
 Hy box contains maps, oiy 
 
23 
 
 ENOLTSn GHAArMAR AT7D ATq-ALTSTS. 
 
 'm 
 
 my book. The duke entertained my father. The mason repairs 
 our playground. Mother makes my bag. She forgot my orders. 
 The rain destroyed our flowers. Aunt purchased my knife. Wo 
 lose our time. The king's children deserted him. They desire 
 our company. Our friends grow some fine apples. The country 
 tailor made my coat. The sly fox stole two ducks. "We hooked an 
 eel. She remembered me. It sur^irises us. Our boys tease thom. 
 My portrait attracted him. Our uncle warned you. Our strange 
 behaviour shocked them. 
 
 79. The simple personal pronoun of the 2nd 
 person. 
 
 Singular. JPlural 
 
 JV^om.{orsuhJ.)ThoVL orYoii 
 Ohj. Thee or You 
 
 Voss. Thy or Your 
 
 N'om. (or suhj.) Ye or You 
 OhJ. You 
 
 Foss. Your 
 
 Exercise 45. 
 
 Letters reached. Your letters reached. Basin broke. Thy 
 basm broke. Ycmv dra^vings please me. Thy umbrella slioltered 
 us. Thou honourest thy parents. Your shoemaker made your 
 shoes. You opened your door. Our key suits your look. Your 
 house adjoins om- garden. My daughter lost your address. Ho 
 performed the chief steward's duty. I eat my supper. Your in- 
 fluence saved them. We give our thanks. Thy right hand up- 
 holds her. The great heat destroyed our neighbour's strawberries. 
 We love our father. Your dear old grandmother resembles your 
 own (adj.) mother. 
 
 80. The words which denote the possessor corres- 
 ponding to the simple pronouns of the third person, 
 singular, are His for the masculine, B'crfov the femi- 
 nnie, and Its neither masculine nor feminine. 
 
 The plural is Their for all genders. 
 
 81. The simple personal pronouns of the 3rd 
 person. 
 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 N'o'in. "I 
 
 He She It 
 
 or suhj.) 
 
 Ooj. Him Her It 
 
 Poss. His Her Its 
 
 ^''^^^;'J They 
 or suhj, I ^ 
 
 They They 
 
 ObJ. Them Them Them 
 Poss. Their TJieir Their 
 
PEllSOKAL PRONOUNB. 
 
 29 
 
 Exercise 4.6. 
 
 "*" ,'?Tf a Your presencetste. his safety. My uncle mar- 
 rare bird died. Your P'^s^""^ ™ j ,„ter our little cham- 
 
 i':? ^Zre;" -JbrsS rek\rokl Mary's needle b^oke 
 ;StaS.^TLfM,^good opinion^ JouspoaU^^^^^^^^^ 
 crowd streets, ^be city s innaoua u. j j ^ ^g „ao 
 
 encbanted them xiie iieavjr d ^ ^.^^ 
 
 await your commands. Their horse huit *^^^/^°-. , ^ g^^^^ their 
 Lhabil its shores. You observe its decay. Her ^t^f^ the 
 hair. The leaves X' ^ideTleft U ^a" Thunder 
 captives' chains. ^^^^^^^^^3^33 ty^photograph. The butcher 
 frightens my cattle, ion Possesa my i « ^ ^ ^^. 
 
 cut his arm. I admire her nodness- The stranger ^^^ ^.^^^^^ 
 brella He delivered his first speech. »ne «oyg"«' ^ , 
 
 S- inLtry -courapd their laz.r^^^^^^^^^^ A-J 
 
 protects our merchants' ^'''P 'Jj^^^S thes"»" •'»»*'« ^''l'- 
 boldness encouraged them. I*? P''''^^^ '';™„ Their iudoment de- 
 The enemy's shot Med our to--;^' -J^;^ t„mS °The deep 
 
 ?£/;r;4u7:oitti^^^^^^^^ 
 
 XrlininI small vessels br^t^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 skirts our estate, ihese >^i'^"^" '^ . , t^ g^,^ ^jody sleeps. 
 
 us. 
 
 83. All tliese possessors corresponding to tlie smi- 
 ple personal pronouns require to be follo^Yed by a 
 noun Id order to complete the sense. 
 
 83. Wlien no noun follows, different 
 of these possessors are I'scl 
 
 forms for some 
 
 
I 
 
 80 
 
 mine 
 
 tliiue 
 
 hers 
 
 ours 
 
 yours 
 
 theirs 
 
 She 
 
 Bends 
 
 hers 
 
 KNOLISH GEAMMAE AND A5ALTBIB. 
 
 It 
 
 >» 
 tt 
 
 »i 
 
 thy 
 her „ 
 our „ 
 your „ 
 their,, 
 
 E^,—}Vith noun expressed. Without a nouru 
 is used for my, as, He orings my book. He brings mine. 
 
 I have thy knife. I have thme. 
 She has her needle. She has hers. 
 You got our chair. You got ours. 
 "We have your slate. We have yours. 
 They sold their house. They sold theirb 
 Ex.— She sends hers. 
 a Bim. pers. pron., 3rd pcrs., sing., fem., nom. (or suhj.) 
 
 to send. (Rule I.) , 
 
 a trans, verb, 3rd pera., sing., pres. time, agr., with sfie. 
 
 a s\m! pers. pron., 3rd pers., sing., fem., poss. {the noun 
 not expressed). 
 
 Exercise 47. 
 
 James forgot yours. A careless boy lost mine. The Btrong heat 
 spoiled ours I had mine. He lent yoms. They boiled theirs. 
 She neglects hers. Twelve trees encircle mine. Some labourers 
 removed ours. Your plan failed. My friend sent his. The 
 earl's eon built that castle. They borrowed yours. He_ dyed 
 his. The judge praised theirs. Our coachman repaired mine. 
 
 COMPLETE TABLE OE SIMPLE PEESONAL 
 
 PEONOUNS. 
 
 84. Pirst Person. 
 
 SingulcLT. 
 
 Nom. (or siilj). I 
 
 Foss, T^7 or mine 
 
 Ohj. me 
 
 Second Person. 
 
 Mm. (or siilj.) Thou or You 
 
 Foss. thy or thine „ your or yours 
 
 Ohj. thee „ycu 
 
 Third Person. 
 Masc. Fem. Keith. All Genders. 
 
 Flural. 
 We 
 
 our or ours 
 us 
 
 Ye or You 
 your or yours 
 you 
 
 Nom. (or suJjj.) ^*-Q >-'-"3 
 
 F0S8» 
 
 Ohj, 
 
 It 
 his her or hers its 
 him her it 
 
 TllAV 
 
 J 
 
 their or theirs 
 them 
 
 THECC 
 
 85. Th( 
 from the 
 of the wc 
 plural, t' 
 ijoitr, ther. 
 
 86. Tt 
 
 object ac 
 
 myself 
 
 c^:c. 
 
 They tl 
 loved he] 
 injured j 
 panion n 
 poor prif 
 bonnet, 
 dewy gra 
 her fan. 
 a little b; 
 lecture c 
 
 86a. 
 
 possess 
 
 By SOT] 
 correcl 
 
 87. 
 
 prone 
 
t a noun% 
 
 Qgs mine, 
 tliine. 
 IS hers. 
 )t ours, 
 ve yours, 
 old theiib 
 
 (or subj.) 
 with she. 
 [the noun 
 
 trong heat 
 led theirs. 
 
 labourers 
 his. The 
 
 He dyed 
 3d mine. 
 
 SONAL 
 
 iral. 
 ' ours 
 
 You 
 or yours 
 
 renders, 
 
 or theirs 
 
 TEESOKAL PBONOUyS. 
 
 81 
 
 THE COMPOUND PEESONAL PKONOUNS. 
 
 85. The compound PXloCTX'aSon 
 from the Binv^^o P^^-^f ^^aTa^ selves for the 
 
 \ . ..m.perr^SJ^^:^-'- 
 
 i to did. (Rulel.) ,,„.„- sing., eith., nom. 
 
 myself a comp. pers. pron., Ist pcre., sm^ , 
 Tr (or subj.) the same as J. 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 They tbemselves ^^^<^^^-,^^::t''nX'T^^^^: 'ou 
 ,o,ed levBdt. I ^--P'^^'^t.Sf t'it. It p.id itself. HU com- 
 iniiircd yourself. .^°" /°"v\„,,elt read the paragraph, ihe 
 panion neglects Inmsel . ^ ^'^'J/on. He Mmself brings her 
 poor prisoner awaila U«™8SJ'ar™n. ^^^^ „j„ 
 
 Lnnet. "^onr JcinAness srlcnoo me 1 « ^^ j^^^^„ ^^^^^.l t 
 dewy grass. We value ourselves. J-"" '^ themseWes made 
 her fan. Your mother ««'«..' ^'i,.° We ourselves went Th. 
 
 86a. The word o.n is f-^^tlt^SCo^ 
 
 correct to call it an adjective. 
 
 - 
 
 AISALYTIOAL LESSON V. 
 
 87. In a sentence both Bubject and object may b. 
 ^""°r-I address ,o«. Vou yom^self lost Ins boo.. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 I 
 
 You yourself 
 
 address 
 lost 
 
 you. 
 his book. 
 
I 
 
 82 
 
 EJSTGLISH OEAMMAr AND AJTALIBIB. 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 
 
 address 
 you. 
 
 You 
 
 yourself 
 
 lost 
 
 bis 
 
 book. 
 
 Particular Analysis. 
 
 (in-on.) simple subject. 
 {verb.) predicate. 
 [pron.) simple object. 
 
 (pron.) simple subject. 
 
 {pron.) enlargement of subject. 
 
 {verb.) predicate. 
 
 {pro7i. pos8.) enlargement of object. 
 
 {noun) simple object. 
 
 Analyse Bsercises 34 to 48 inclusive. 
 
 PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 88. In a sentence the word whicli shows how a 
 noun or pronoun is related to any other word, is 
 called a Preposition : as, lie went fmn London to 
 
 Dover. 
 
 89. Like most verbs, the preposition acts on the 
 noun or pronoun which follows it. The preposition 
 therefore, generally has after it an ohjed, from whicb 
 it cannot be separated without destroying the sense. 
 
 90. Syntax.— Eule VI.— Prepositions govern the 
 
 objecti>o case. 
 
 Ex. — Sbe ran to the shop, 
 a sim. pers. pron., Srdpera., sing.,, fem.,nom. (or subj.) 
 
 to ran. (Rule I.) 
 an intrans. verb, 3rd pers., sing., past time, agr. with 
 
 she. (Rule II.) 
 a preposition, acting on sliop. 
 a dist. adj., qual. shop. (Rule IV.) 
 a nouup 3rd pers., sing., neith., obj., by to. (Rule VI.) 
 
 She 
 
 ran 
 
 to 
 
 the 
 shop. 
 
 Exercise 49. 
 
 The apples grow. The apples grow in the garden. The boys ran. 
 The boys ran up the street. The dog crept through the hole. They 
 went to Greenwich. He departed from the house. You stood at the 
 Ih-e. The boat sailed across the stream. He passed beneath the 
 bridge. The animal pushed against the wall. Ucr brother looks 
 round the corner. Their cliild fell into the water. Our letters 
 
 
 camo t>i 
 
 Your clc 
 
 houses' 
 
 the stati 
 
 The sm 
 
 fihoulde 
 
 carter l 
 
 mill. 1 
 
 travelle 
 
 box. "] 
 
 upon h; 
 
 field._ 
 
 weepiu 
 
 end of 
 
 church 
 
 him fn 
 
 to the 
 
 into t 
 
 passed 
 
 park. 
 
 His fti 
 
 weeks, 
 
 He an 
 
 at my 
 
 from 
 
 gfl^ring 
 
 Lond( 
 
 mark( 
 
 (day 
 
 fashic 
 
 cntcri 
 
 Weill 
 
 The ■ 
 
 besid 
 
 some 
 
 passe 
 
 to so 
 
 the ^ 
 
 buttt 
 
 ronn 
 
 t,hv^,i 
 
 She 
 
 thva] 
 
 bear 
 
 the 1 
 
 iiaiK 
 
 I 
 
PEEPOBITIONB. 
 
 83 
 
 1. 
 
 t. 
 
 Dws riow a ^^■ 
 T word, is 
 London to 
 
 lets on the' 
 )repositioii 
 from wliich 
 Ike sense. 
 
 govern the J 
 
 lom. (or subj.) 
 [me, agr, with 
 
 !o. (Rule VI.) 
 
 The boys ran. 
 he hole. They 
 lu stood at the 
 id beneath the 
 : brother looks 
 . Our letters 
 
 came ^y the post, ^he carpent^^^^^ 
 
 Your clergyman slays beyond the wood, ii y i ^^^^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 houBes' tops. I put the paper "^ ^^^^ ^(^J^ ^\^ ,ound the table, 
 the statue on the ^^onument. The children ^^ ^^.^ 
 
 The smoke goes up the dnmney. The ^^^^^ P^^, ^3, The stout 
 shoulder. The B^eamcr lies bc^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^ from the 
 
 carter brought corn. ,T^^\^^^^^;.fKn?g ^^^^^ The mcssengei 
 mill. They built her house on the ^^ « «^^«- ^ him with the 
 travelled through the f^ounda to the v^^^^^^^^ 1^ n ^^^^^.^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 box. The boys Imrriea «^f\f„ *!^° °I^^^^^^^^ bridge into the 
 
 npon his sword. The deer If P^^^^T.f Vg ^^^ hour. Her 
 fi^ld. They desisted ^f «^^ ^heir ^rk^^^^ «^e Prop^ ^^ i,,^ the 
 
 weepii.,: daughter ^^^f^ X^Hhrfo^^ up the street, round the 
 end of the room. They pursued th^ ^^ ^^^^^^,,j^t 
 
 church, through the hedge, mto t^^J°° ^^ ^,^ f,om the cage 
 
 liim fron- the shop to ^^^P^^^-^^f^ f.^S the lake, over the rock, 
 to the window. The waters rush from tue 1 ^^ recession 
 
 into the pool at the ^^^tom 'Df *^^^^^^^^^ the 
 
 passed along the road, tbrough the arch, to i ^^^ ^^^^^ 
 
 ^ark. The candle gave some light t^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^ j,^ 
 
 His family removed ^f ^ab ^^^Hw? C^^ pounds (£200). 
 weeks. You sold our .^^^^}^ .^^XJel Mv old friend visited me 
 He arrived in the morning at ^^ hotel. My ^ j^ 
 
 at my house, beyond the boundaiy the ei^y^^^^ ^.^ ^^^^ 
 from Elba in a boat, ihe new weaves ^ii ,. j ^^^q city of 
 !;iing. He conveyed the messag^ to^^^^^^^^^ 
 London. You bought the cow ^^^"^ /^J ^ ge died on the lOlh 
 n^arket of Falldrk on^t^^^^ ^ The smith 
 
 (day of) July. ^,^.'„ f,.^,r. Rome h'on in the shop. vVe 
 Uioned the horses' shoes om some ion ^^^^ ^^ ^ 
 
 entered at six hours of the clocK vv Waterloo. 
 
 Wellington fought against N^PO^^on m^^^^^^^ m his place 
 
 The prince arnved before him. ine^P ^^^^^,^ 
 
 beside the chair at the heau of the room ine ^^^^ 
 
 some money from them. She v, alkedbem^^^^^^ Ms epistle 
 passed t)u-ough the midst ohem^^^ ^^e newspaper arrived by 
 
 to some strangers '"^ .^^^'''f^^f^'^^ The boys pursued the 
 the vessel from our friends ^^ Canada. 1 ^ 1 ^^ 
 butterfly from thejood th ough the h^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 round thebank of the Pond,j^own t^^e glen, ^^^^^^ ^^^^,^ 
 
 through the gate, into tlgaid^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ ,,,r 
 
 She wandered beside tiie '^^siies. x ^^^^ ^^,^^ 
 
d4 
 
 ENGLISH GBAMMAB AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 wall. A company of horsemen lined the route. The illness of the 
 regent alarmed the ministers. The hoat on .he lake sank. The 
 chief of Ulva's Isle lost his bride. The angel of death spread his 
 wings en the blas^ The antlered monarch of the waste sprang 
 from his heathery couch in haste. The maid with hasty oar 
 pushed her light shallop from the shore. He took her with him 
 to Sicily. The writer of that charming work of fiction died in 
 the hour of triumph. The grief of a mother for a lost child 
 affects us. The hopes of a splendid career vanished with his 
 patron's ruin. He lives like* a king. You stay near* tho river. 
 We stood next* the door. 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON VI. 
 
 91. Since tlie object completes the action expressed 
 by the predicate, it is likewise called the Completion 
 of the Predicate. 
 
 Ex.— The fisherman brought a lobster. 
 The sense is not complete if we only say The fisherman 
 brought. 
 To complete the sens'^, we require to say a lobster, 
 
 92. Whatever word or words are required to com- 
 plete the sense implied by the predicate, are called 
 the Completion of the Predicate. 
 
 93. Whatever modifies the meaning of the predi- 
 cate, but is not required to complete the sense, is 
 called the Extension of the^Predicate ; as. He slept : 
 He slept in a cave. In a cave is an extension of tho 
 predicate. 
 
 94. Ex.— 1. The king dismissed his servant. 
 
 2. The boy stood on the burning deck. 
 
 3. He broke a chair in his rage. 
 
 4. The story of the fairy entertained the children 
 
 for many nights. 
 
 • Some consider Uhey near, and next as adjectives, and under- 
 stand to. (Sco No. 95.) 
 
PUErOSlTIOKS. 
 
 86 
 
 Sithject^ 
 i7"The king 
 
 2. The boy 
 
 3. He 
 
 4. The story of the I 
 
 fairy ^ 
 
 General Analysis. 
 
 ^i^i^^^ hiB servant l^l"^^)^,^. 
 stood (^07i<3) M ingdeck. 
 
 broke 
 entertained 
 
 . a chair I in his rage, 
 the children for many mghtf 
 
 Ex. 4.— The 
 
 story 
 
 of the fairy 
 
 entertained 
 
 the 
 
 children 
 
 Particular Analysis. 
 {adj.) enlargement of subject. 
 
 Yverh) simple predicate. 
 \adj.) enlargement of object. 
 
 children 1 {noun) eiiJ^Pj^ ;^^j;f ' t^^ of predicate, 
 for many nights. 1 {vrep^ and its case) exten. P 
 
 Analyze Exercise 49 generally and particularly. 
 
 Exercise 50. 
 
 The grocer sent that l.m to me 0.. gocer -t me^ha 
 ham. You made a box for me. J^^^^^^ ^he librarian lent 
 him a pen. The librarian lent a book t^ y^^^ ^ ^^ ^^^,^ He 
 you a book. You stayed for an hoi^r. xou 6 J^^^^ H^ 
 
 ;^aited five minutes. .J^^^^^^Tef ^The wood extends thirty 
 
 leaves next week. It .f^.TJ^JJ^^We stood near liim. They 
 miles. They rode a mile ^^^^ day. We bw ^^^ ^^^ 
 
 fought like men. The manager procured me a ^^^ 
 
 sold him 200 tons Thomas brou^Mme^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 professor showed them a ^^^^,f fi,,^,^^w They hesitated 
 
 i celebrated geologist gave us the fiit^ 1^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 a few moments. The ^'eporter for the newspap ^^^^^^^ 
 
 news. He brings me ««^«f^°^.^i°f'\ft. They departed last 
 laiots an hour. You sent the f"\^ gf^i,,\ ^o the covmUy 
 xmr. The;y walked six miles. He ^^^^^, ^'^^^^ .^gt fiye pene^ 
 ivervdav The guosts remained a montli. iney cubu f 
 
 J'oLnd! The eggs sell at a shilling a down. 
 
 D 2 
 
BQ 
 
 ENGLISH GBAMMAIi AlfD AiJALTRJlS. 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON YII. 
 
 96. Ex. — I gave Kim a book. 
 Wliat was given? A looh. Booh is called tli6 
 Direct Object, and him the Indirect Object. 
 
 General Analysis. 
 
 Subject. I Predicate. 
 
 gave 
 
 Gomp. of Fred. 
 
 gave 
 him 
 
 a 
 book 
 
 him a book. 
 
 Particular Analysis. 
 
 [pro.) eimple subject. 
 {verV) simple predicate. 
 {-pron.) indirect object. 
 [adj.) enlargeuient of object. 
 [noun) direct object. 
 
 Exten. of Fred, 
 
 [none) 
 
 Analyze, generally and particularly. Exorcise 50. 
 
 INVEBTED SENTENCES. 
 
 97. In the sentences hitherto given, the subject 
 has always come first, the predicate next, and the 
 object (when present) iast. This is called the Birect 
 Order. But these parts may also be placed in 
 different orders, to all of which the term Indirect is 
 applied. 
 
 Ex. — The sorrowing son the long-lost father found [Ind. order). 
 The sorrowing sen found the long-lost father {I)ire< order). 
 
 Note.— When a sentence is not in the direct order, let the 
 pupil always put it so before parsing it. 
 
 Put the following sentences in their direct order 
 where necessary, and parse them : — 
 
 Exercise 51. 
 
 The gushing flood dyed the tartfins. The rushing flood tha 
 tartans dyed. ~ A soldier went by night through gloomy forest 
 shades. Through ploomy forest shades a soldier went by night. 
 That scene of blood that mother viewed. On the ground lay the 
 
'^■ 
 
 ailed the 
 
 . of Pred, 
 
 lone) 
 
 cise 50. 
 
 3 subject 
 , and the 
 he Direct 
 ilaced in 
 indirect is 
 
 id. order). 
 'rc( ' order). 
 
 der, let the 
 •ect order 
 
 ig flood tha 
 lomy forest 
 it by night, 
 unci lay the 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 87 
 
 ,.e Mer. The ^^ZZ^^^^^^^^ ^^ 
 
 tory gazed the stranger. Jhe falcon t Trossach's mldest 
 
 band a vrondenng eye. The ^^er i ^^^^ ^^^ horn resounds, 
 
 nook his solitary refuge took. Throug^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^.^ 
 
 Upon this hint spake I. ior ^J; ^^^^g shrubs the flowermg 
 daughters? Ye have daughters. Jo 1^^^^^^^ With open 
 
 palms succeed. Our i^^^^^^^d guch a fearful noise the 
 earts, of many a Bccne^e talk^^^^^^ SucU ^ ^^^^^ ^.^^^^^^ 
 
 roaring waters made. On the g^^'^H^?, , j^ wondrous merry 
 
 TlSls ran a troop of strange cl^^dren.^ I 
 
 mood I wrote some li^^s. Three^ ca i ^ g^^ ^^^^,^^ j^ 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON VIH. 
 98. Analyze Exercise 51, according to the following 
 
 Suhject. 
 
 A soldier 
 
 Pr^d!. 
 
 went 
 
 Cowi). of Fred. 
 
 {none) 
 
 Exten. of Fred. 
 
 through gloomy forest shades, 
 by night. 
 
 Through gloomy I j (^.^p. and its case) exten. of predicate. 
 
 forest shades / 
 a 
 soldier 
 went 
 by night 
 
 (adj.) enlargement of subject. 
 {noun) simple subject. 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 99. A roA has teen defined to ho the word in fte 
 sentence that tells what Js clone. 15ut a vcrD may 
 «ko cxweL mwe leinj : as, Peter is a lawyer. 
 
 1 veil, is Tword that expresses lemy or domg. 
 
 on.. m,„^nr'\'<nondme!mi manner. The same vcrD 
 is W Tn di« moods according to the idea wh.ch 
 
M *i 
 
 88 
 
 ENGLISH GBAMMAB A"NT) AKALTSIS. 
 
 it is desired to convey; as, He brings the book. 
 Bring the book. He goes to bring tlie book. He 
 must bring the book. 
 
 „ikt 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 100. "When a simple affirmation or statement is 
 made, the Indicative Mood is used. It is the mood 
 which has been employed in all the past exercises. 
 
 Ex. — She loves. 
 
 She a sim. pers. pron., 3rd pars., sing., fern., nom. (or subj.) 
 
 to loves. (Rule I.) 
 loves a trans, verb, 3rcl pers., sing., pres. time, indicative 
 
 mood, agr. with she, (Rule II.) 
 
 Exercise 52. 
 
 They spoke. The lambs bleat. The village bells ring. The 
 eagle spied the hare. The distant star gives some light. The 
 moon reflects the sun's light. He spent all his brother's fortune. 
 The monarch received a grand ovation. The decanter on the 
 table contained bright, sparkling water. James Watt died at 
 Soho. In boyhood he watched the steam from the kettle. At 
 eighteen years of age he went to Glasgow. He surveyed the 
 canal from the Forth to the Clyde. You sent him a rude message. 
 The squire lent them his influence. The servant brought me my 
 spectacles. Ours lived to a great age. She borrowed their.g. 
 The pupil prepares his. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 101. "Wlien the action indicated by the verb is 
 expressed, without being limited by time, person, or 
 number, the Infinitive Mood is used. It is generally 
 preceded by the word to, which is called its sign ; as, 
 To love, to sing, to go, etc. 
 
 In parsing this mood, the to is not separated from it ; and care 
 must be taken to distinguish between to, the sign of the Infini. 
 tive and to, the prepositions 
 
 A verb is generally named by its Infinitive Mood ; thus we 
 speak of tlie verb To send. 
 
VOOD. 
 
 89 
 
 She 
 loves 
 
 flower 
 
 to 
 me 
 
 E* -She lovefl to bring a flower to me. 
 a ZX P-' ?f ^-^^ '^''^ '^"•' ''"• ' ^' 
 
 ftcrr. with she. (Rule II.) 
 to bring a ve^rb {why ?), infinitive mood. 
 
 (Rule III.) 
 :S:'pers."ron.. IstTpers.. Bing.. eith.. obj. by *o. 
 (Rule YI.) 
 
 Exercise 53. 
 
 i. i.^ «« TiiA \ncked man leara 
 They intendedto sail. I^Jf^^X The rlin began to fall, 
 to die. The masons P^^PT^e^^Sd traveller retired to sleep. 
 Our men ought to work. The w^a^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ vegetables. 
 
 They sent to seek him. The 6er^am go ^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 iheVnd blew under he door along ^^^ ^ ^^^^^^_ H^ 
 
 We came to Usten.^ ^^^^'^V'^^e empe^o? threatened to invade 
 disdaine(i to beg his l^^^^f • J J^' S the town of Dover. The 
 their country. . Tl^e sons went to live m ^^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ 
 
 Bim begins to rise. The horses tried to ^^^^^^^^ ^^ 
 
 owanls the winning post. Jhe nuise b^^^^^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 see the wild beasts Yon jBh to si ea^k ^^^.^ p,oinises to 
 
 determined to sell all their fo^K. v i- ^^^^ proceeded 
 
 reach the nearest land "^,^ ^^y/^^y^., ^^^^^^^ churchyard, 
 
 to visit the English poet's 8 ^^^.^^^f^^;^^^ The colonel sent 
 
 He thought to save V^^l^ ^^^1^. Retried to come 
 
 an officer to if,r''.'''^° It lingered beside that old arm charr. 
 to us. In childhood's l^o^^'' I ^^^^eered oes ^^.^ ^ ^^^ 
 
 After the warm rains of ^^^f, «^^f ^X;som Comfort came the 
 vigour in a matchless .^^^^^^ of bio som ^.^^^.^^^ ^^ ^,^^^ 
 
 trmbling wretch^ to If^^'^'Jf, ^,?ative quarry. I went to 
 her heaven-aspiring wmg beneatn its i^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^ 
 
 see the Coliseum by n^oo^^^^g^^^^; . ^ *° gtep into the courtyard. I 
 of the work. I had some occasion tx) step m ^^^ ^^ .^^^^^ 
 
 iook the liberty to boil my peas She fine ^^^^^^ ^^^^ 
 ^oe. Yours tried to escape. We agreed t^^^^ ^^^^ ^ ^^^^^ ^^ 
 herself read the speech. They Md in 
 forgave him his fault that day. 
 
 mi 
 
40 
 
 ENGLISH GEAMMAB AlTD ANALYSIS. 
 
 i 
 
 ■Hi ^ht 
 
 IM 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON IX 
 
 103. The predicate may be completed by an infini- 
 tive mood, instead of by a noun or pronoun ; as, He 
 tried to read. 
 
 103. The pr> .•3ate may also have an infinitive 
 mood as an extension j as, They searched the room 
 to find it. 
 
 104. If the extension tells loliy the action is done, 
 it is called an extension of Cause ; as, We eat to live. 
 The family left the town for a cliamje of air. 
 
 105. If the extension tells lolien the action is done, 
 it is called an extension of Time ; as. The sun shone 
 in the morning. 
 
 106. If the extension tells wTiere the action is done, 
 ft is called an extension of Place ; as. He lived in an 
 inn at Lyons. 
 
 107. If the extension tells liow the action is done, 
 it is called an extension of Manner ; as, She sang the 
 soiag in a charming manner. 
 
 Exten. of Pred. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Pred. 
 
 Comp. 
 of Pred. 
 
 He 
 
 tried 
 
 to read. 
 
 They 
 
 searched 
 
 the room 
 
 We 
 
 3at 
 
 
 The family 
 
 left 
 
 the town 
 
 The sun 
 
 shone 
 
 
 He 
 
 lived 
 
 
 Bhe 
 
 sang 
 
 the song 
 
 to find it (cause). 
 
 to live (cause) . 
 
 for a change of air (cause). 
 
 in the morning (time). 
 
 in an inn at Lyons (i^lace). 
 
 in a charming manner (manner). 
 
 Analyze in the same manner Exercise 53. 
 
 ITi/r-mTiTi A mTTTTi •nirnnTk 
 uJL£JZiS\iJX2.JL V Jki ^Ti.wVi/. 
 
 108. The Imperative Mood expresses a command 
 or request ; as, Shut the door. Forgive mo- 
 
JdOOD. 
 
 41 
 
 the 
 door 
 
 ,09. O^e f if j,teXelSv»X 
 rnSK^l^rSrt plural. 
 
 I UO. The subject or -f^^^Z^^'^^v^ '^^\ 
 1 Ex —Shut the door. ^ 
 
 a iSt. adj., qual. door (^J ^b^y s?iwt. (Rule III.) 
 a nwin, 3rd pers., smg., neith., odj. ujr 
 
 Exercise 54. 
 
 Hal. (you) no noise LgM (t^^ou) the^^^^^ q:);,, 
 
 letter. Catch (ye) the thi^^^^^^^ Remem- 
 
 breaHast. RePft all your lessons, i^u g ^^^^ ^^^^ j^.^^^ ]3o 
 
 ber your mother's message, Tear ^^^- ^ ^^.^^ the maps 
 
 '"m'e little good ^eed. Love the bre^^^^^^^^ ^^^^ ,y ,, 
 
 on fine thick paper Send a box o b ^^^^^^^ Take care of 
 
 steamer. Go into the 8^;^^^/^',^^'^ Bometb.ing to the poor 
 
 the pence. Sell a^l f "f^ g^^^'; '^^st the wall. Except me. 
 folks. The moss M^ose grows agains ^^^^ ^^ 
 
 Every person ^^P^^^^.^ tedsS Vitt the bells. Take notice 
 fellow men. Hear the fledges wu ^^^^ contending 
 
 Begin to play yourse ves. Heaid l^««^ ^ ^^^^ gea. Smg to 
 ^a?e.? Sound the loud timbrel oerl^gyp^^^ ^^^^ phie-tree's 
 me that song. Come ye in p^^^^^^^^ Stay with us. 
 
 ;vithered branch I Hear a helpless^orP ^^^^ , 
 
 your glorious standard launcl^^to^^^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ .^ountam's 
 
 thy spoils C/^^^gf,,^*^ K^ Jeedours. 
 
 gorge hasten thy steps, oni^b 
 
 ■? 41 
 
 ANALYTICAL I--!5SS0N X. 
 HI Ex -Destroy the weeds to save the flowerB. 
 
 l^^;;Zi^)^ the weed, to -a.e t|. Hcers 
 
 ^' Tulhe ahoye manner analyse Exercise 54,. 
 
 Ijfcl 
 
12 
 
 ENGLISH GEAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF YEEBS. 
 
 112. Three moods of the verb have now been re- 
 ferred to, the Indicative, Imperative, and Infinitive, 
 The fourth is called the Participial mood, or the Parti- 
 ciples. ITiis mood has both a present and past time or 
 tense, but only one form for each. The present par- 
 ticiple always ends in ing ; as, loving, running. The 
 past participle has diiFerent endings according to the 
 verb of which it is a part. 
 
 113. All the various moods of the verb, with their 
 tenses, persons, and numbers, form its Conjugation. 
 
 ^i4. There are two kinds of Yerbs, Regular and 
 Irregular. 
 
 115. When the past indicative and the past partk 
 ciple are formed by adding d or ed to the present, the 
 verb is called Regular ; as, 
 
 Past Participle* 
 loved, 
 turned. 
 
 116. The last three parts are called the Principal 
 'Parts of the verb. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Pres. Ind, 
 
 Past Ind. 
 
 To love 
 
 love 
 
 loved 
 
 To turn 
 
 turn 
 
 turned 
 
 Infinitive. 
 To love 
 
 REGULAR CONJUGATION. 
 
 Principal Parts. 
 Pres. Ind. Past Ind. Past Participle, 
 
 love 
 
 loved 
 
 loved. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Time or Tense. 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 1 Pers. I love 1 Pers. We love 
 
 2 „ Thou lovest, or, You love 2 „ Ye or you love 
 
 3 .. He loves (loveth) 8 „ They love. 
 
 II 
 
CONJUGATION OP VEEBB. 
 
 48 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 Singular. , „ rS^T\ 
 
 1 Fers. I loved 1 P^rs. We loved 
 
 2 „ Thou lovedst, or, You loved 2 „ Ye or you loved 
 
 3 „ He loved 8 .. They loved. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Singular. riural. 
 
 2 Pers. Love, or, Love thou 2 Pcrs. Love, or, Love ye 
 
 or you or you. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 JPresent To love. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present Loving. 
 J>ast Loved. 
 All tlie regular verbs are conjugated in tlie same 
 manner. 
 
 117. Conjw^ate the Terbs tiirn, gain, live, lelieve, 
 kill, pierce, sumd, call, attend, Jill, save, 
 
 118 When the past indicative and past participle 
 ,rlnot formed by 'adding d or ed to the present, the 
 verb is called Irregular ; as, „ . . , 
 Infinitive. Pres. M. Past Ind. Past ParUapU. 
 
 To rise ' rise rose risen. 
 
 LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 119 I Those verbs which have the same form for 
 P™nt and Past Indicative, and Past Participle ; as, 
 
 Frcs. Ind. Past Ind. Past Part, j PresLrd. Past Ind. Past Part. 
 Burst burst burst. | Cast cast casi. 
 
 So also cost, cut, Ut, lurt Jcnif, let put, rid, set, 
 sited, shut, slit, split, spread, thrust, wed. 
 
44 
 
 ENGLISH GBAMMA.R AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 120. II. Those verbs which have the same form foi"! 
 the Past Indicative and Past Participle only. 
 
 Pres.Ind. Past Ind 
 
 Abide abode 
 
 Behold beheld 
 
 Bend* bent 
 
 Bereave* bereft 
 
 Beseech besought 
 
 Bind bound 
 
 Bleed bled 
 
 Bring brought 
 
 Build* built 
 
 Burn* burnt 
 
 Buy bought 
 
 Catch caught 
 
 CHng clung 
 
 Clothe* clad 
 
 Creep crept 
 
 Deal dealt 
 
 I*ig* dug 
 
 Dream* dreamt 
 
 Dwell* dwelt 
 
 Feed fed 
 
 Feel felt 
 
 Fight fought 
 
 S'ind found 
 
 Flee fled 
 
 Fling flung 
 
 Get got 
 
 Grind ground 
 
 Hang* hung 
 
 Have had 
 
 Hear heard 
 
 Hold held 
 
 Keep kept 
 
 Kneel* knelt 
 
 Lay laid 
 
 Lead 1 
 
 Leave ic, 
 
 JJend lent 
 
 . Past Part. 
 
 Pres. hid 
 
 abode 
 
 Lose 
 
 beheld 
 
 Make 
 
 bent 
 
 Mean* 
 
 bereft 
 
 Meet 
 
 besought 
 
 Pay 
 
 bound 
 
 Read 
 
 bled 
 
 Rend 
 
 brought 
 
 Say 
 
 built 
 
 Seek 
 
 burnt 
 
 Sell 
 
 bought 
 
 Send 
 
 caught 
 
 Shine 
 
 clung 
 
 Shoe 
 
 clad 
 
 Shoot 
 
 crept 
 
 Sit 
 
 dealt 
 
 Sleep 
 
 dug 
 
 Slide 
 
 dreamt 
 
 Sling 
 
 dwelt 
 
 Smell* 
 
 fed 
 
 Speed 
 
 felt 
 
 Spend 
 
 fought 
 
 Spill* 
 
 found 
 
 Stand 
 
 fled 
 
 Sting 
 
 flung 
 
 Strike 
 
 got 
 
 
 ground 
 
 String 
 
 hung 
 
 Sweep 
 
 had 
 
 Swing 
 
 heard 
 
 Teach 
 
 held 
 
 Tell 
 
 kept 
 
 Think 
 
 knelt 
 
 Weep 
 
 laid 
 
 Win 
 
 led 
 
 Wind 
 
 left 
 
 Work* 
 
 lent 
 
 Wring 
 
 I. Past Ind. Past Part] 
 
 lost lost 
 
 made made 
 
 meant meant 
 
 met met 
 
 paid paid 
 
 read read 
 
 rent rent 
 
 said said 
 
 sought sought 
 
 sold sold 
 
 sent sent 
 
 shone shone 
 
 shod shod 
 
 shot shot 
 
 sat sat 
 
 slept slept 
 
 slid BHd 
 
 slung slung 
 
 smelt smelt 
 
 sped sped 
 
 spent spent 
 
 spilt spilt 
 
 stood stood 
 
 stung stung 
 
 struck struck 
 
 (stricken) 
 
 strung strung 
 
 swept swept 
 
 swung swung 
 
 taught taught 
 
 told told 
 
 thought thought 
 
 wept wept 
 
 won won 
 
 wound wound 
 
 wrought wrought 
 
 wrung wrung 
 
 Those verbs marked with an asterisk are also rer^ular. 
 
 121. 1 
 iiid Past 
 
 ^ri's. Ind* 
 
 Am 
 
 Arise 
 
 Awake* 
 
 Bear (to c 
 
 Bear (to I 
 
 Beat 
 
 Begin 
 
 Bid 
 
 Bite 
 
 Blow 
 
 Break 
 
 Cliide 
 
 Choose 
 
 Cleave 
 
 Como 
 
 Crow* 
 
 Do 
 
 Draw 
 
 Drink 
 
 Drive 
 
 Eat 
 
 Fall 
 
 Fly 
 
 Forsake 
 
 Freeze 
 
 (xive 
 
 Go 
 
 Grave* 
 
 Grow 
 
 Hew* 
 
 Hide 
 
 l^now 
 
 Load* 
 
 Lie (to 
 
 Mow* 
 
 Ride 
 
 King 
 
 Eiso 
 
 Run 
 
 See (foi 
 
 Sew 
 
 Shako 
 
:s. 
 
 le form foTl 
 
 i. Past Part] 
 lost 
 made 
 meant 
 met 
 paid 
 read 
 rent 
 Baid 
 Bought 
 Bold 
 sent 
 Blione 
 shod 
 Bhot 
 Bat 
 slept 
 sHd 
 slung 
 smelt 
 sped 
 spent 
 spilt 
 stood 
 stung 
 struck 
 
 (stricken) 
 strung 
 swept 
 swung 
 taught 
 told 
 
 thought 
 wept 
 won 
 wound 
 
 lEEEQULAIl VEEBS. 
 
 45 
 
 121. III. Those 
 nul Past Participle 
 
 ^u'S. Ind* 
 
 Am 
 
 Arise 
 
 Awake* 
 
 Bear (to carry) 
 
 Bear (to bring forth) 
 
 Beat 
 
 Begin 
 
 Bid 
 
 Bite 
 
 Blow 
 
 Break 
 
 Cliide 
 
 Choose 
 
 Cleave 
 
 Come 
 
 Crow* 
 
 Do 
 
 Draw 
 
 Drink 
 
 Drive 
 
 Eat 
 
 Fall 
 
 Fly 
 
 Forsake 
 
 Freeze 
 
 (xive 
 
 Go 
 
 Grave* 
 
 Grow 
 
 Hew* 
 
 Hide 
 
 Know 
 
 Load* 
 
 Lie (to lie down) 
 
 Mow* 
 
 Bide 
 
 Bing 
 
 Eiso 
 
 Run 
 
 See (foresee) 
 
 Sew 
 
 Shako 
 
 verbs in which the Past Tense 
 
 Imve a dif*' "nt form. 
 
 Past Ind, 
 was 
 arose 
 awoke 
 bore (bare) 
 bore (bare) 
 beat 
 began 
 bade (bid) 
 bit 
 blew 
 
 broke (brake) 
 chid 
 chose 
 
 cleft (clove) 
 came 
 crew 
 did 
 drew 
 drank 
 drove 
 ate (eat) 
 fell 
 flew 
 forsook 
 froze 
 gave 
 went 
 graved 
 grew 
 hewed 
 hid 
 knew 
 loaded 
 lay 
 
 mowed 
 rode 
 rang 
 rose 
 ran 
 saw 
 sewed 
 Bhook 
 
 Past Part, 
 
 been 
 
 arisen 
 awaKed(awoko) 
 
 borne 
 
 born 
 
 beaten 
 
 begun 
 
 bidden (bid) 
 
 bitten (bit) 
 
 blown 
 
 broken 
 
 chidden 
 
 chosen 
 
 cleft (cloven) 
 
 come 
 
 crowed 
 
 done 
 
 drawn 
 
 drunk 
 
 driven 
 
 eaten (eat) 
 
 fallen 
 
 flown 
 
 forsaken 
 
 frozen 
 
 given 
 
 gone 
 
 graven 
 
 grown 
 
 hewn 
 
 hidden (hid) 
 
 known 
 
 laden (loaden) 
 
 lain 
 
 mown 
 
 ridden 
 
 rung 
 
 risen 
 
 run 
 
 Been 
 
 sewn 
 shaken 
 
46 
 
 ENaiiaU GllAMMAH AND AKALYafS. 
 
 i§ 
 
 Trcs. Ind, 
 Shave 
 Show 
 ShoTf 
 Shrink 
 Sing 
 Sink 
 Slay 
 Smite 
 Bow* 
 Speak 
 Spin 
 Spit 
 Spriig 
 Steal 
 Stride 
 Strive 
 Strew* 
 Strow 
 Swear 
 Swell* 
 Swim 
 Take 
 Tear 
 Throw 
 Tread 
 Wear 
 Weave 
 Write 
 
 IRBEGULAR CONJUGATION. 
 182. Verb To Mise, 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 rr, • X ,r . ^■^^'*^- We rise 
 Thou nsest, or, You rise 2 „ 
 
 He rises (riseth) 3 ,, 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 Thou rosest, or, You rose 2 , 
 Ho rose « 
 
 Past Ind. 
 
 Vast Part 
 
 ■ 
 
 shaved 
 
 shaven 
 
 ■ '^ 
 
 shewed 
 showed 
 
 shown 
 shown 
 
 1 '2 Vers. His 
 
 shrank 
 
 shraijk 
 
 I 
 
 sang 
 
 sung 
 
 1 
 
 sank 
 
 sunk 
 
 H 
 
 slew 
 
 slain 
 
 1 
 
 smote 
 
 smitten 
 
 1 
 
 sowed 
 
 sown 
 
 I 
 
 spoke (Bpake) . 
 
 spoken 
 
 I 
 
 span (spun) 
 
 spun 
 
 I 
 
 spat 
 
 spitten (spitj 
 
 I A11 ir 
 
 sprang 
 
 sprung 
 
 1 manner. 
 
 stole 
 
 stolen 
 
 
 strode 
 
 stridden 
 
 1 
 
 strovo 
 
 striven 
 
 I 123. C 
 
 Btrewed 
 strowed 
 Bworo 
 swelled 
 
 strewn 
 strown 
 sworn 
 swollen 
 
 1 sell, sleej 
 ■ Write 
 1 gingular 
 
 swam 
 
 swum 
 
 ■ 
 
 took 
 
 taken 
 
 ■ 
 
 tore 
 
 torn 
 
 B 
 
 threw 
 
 thrown 
 
 ■ 
 
 trode 
 
 tioddon 
 
 H 
 
 wore 
 
 worn 
 
 I 124. ^ 
 
 I also cal 
 
 wove 
 wrote 
 
 woven 
 written 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1 Pers. I rise 
 
 2 „ 
 
 3 „ 
 
 1 Pcrs. 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Ye or you rise 
 They rise. 
 
 
 We rose 
 
 Ye or you rose 
 
 They rose. 
 
 1 Pers. 
 
 2 
 
 B 
 
 II 
 
 1 Pers, 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 II 
 
 2 Pers 
 
Illi^ 7EEB "lO BE." 
 
 4ff 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 SUuinlav Plurai. 
 
 I •• Vers, liise, or, Rise thou or you 2 Pm. Bm, or, Hi«e je or you. 
 
 InSnitive. 
 JPreseni To riae. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Present Eisiug. 
 
 Pant »>/'flen. 
 All irregular verbs are ijugated in p similar 
 manner. 
 
 133. Conjugate the verbs write, legin, Uow, go, 
 sell sleep, stand, talce, speah, spring, slow. 
 
 Write out the 2nd person singular 3rd person 
 Bingular, and 1st person plural of the above verbs. 
 
 ) I 
 
 THE YEEB TO J3E. 
 124. The verb To Be is intransitive ; but it is 
 also called the Substantive Verb. (See JN o. 1^7.} 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1 Pcrs f am 1 ^^^'^' ^® ^^^ 
 
 2 tSou art, or, You are 2 „ Yeoryouare 
 8 Hoia 3 „ They are. 
 
 1 Pers, I was 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 1 Pers. We were 
 
 n 
 
 Thou wast, or, YOU were 2 „ ^eo. you were 
 
 . „ Hewaa 3 „ They were. 
 
 Imperative MvOd. 
 2 ftn.^KBe thou or ;ou. 2 Per.. Be, or, B« ye or you. 
 
il 
 
 18 
 
 ENGLISH GEAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 Participles. j 
 
 Present To be. 
 Present. Being. 
 Pas^. Been. 
 
 125. 
 
 THE VEEB TO EAVM 
 Indicative Itlood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Singular, Plural. 
 
 1 Pers. I have 1 Pers. We have 
 
 2 ,, ' Thou hast, or, You have 2 ,, Ye or you have 
 
 3 
 
 »» 
 
 They have. 
 
 He has or hath 3 „ 
 
 Past Tense. 
 1 Pers. I had 1 Pers. We had 
 
 It 
 
 Thou hadst, or, You had 2 ,, 
 He had 3 „ 
 
 Ye or you had 
 They had. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 S Pers. Have,r sHave thou or you. 2 Pers. Have, or,Have ye or yonj 
 I .finitive. Present. To have. 
 
 Participles. I ^'^'f'^' l'''''^' 
 ^ ( Past. Had. 
 
 
 126. THE YEEB TO BO, 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 'lingular. Plural 
 
 1 Pers. I do IPers. We do , 
 
 2 „ Thou doest or dost, or, Yon do 2 „ Ye or you do 
 
 3 „ He does or doth. 3 „ They do. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 1 Pers. I did 1 Pcrs. We did 
 
 2 „ Tliou didst, or, You did 2 ,, Ye or you did 
 
 It 
 
 He did 
 
 3 
 
 )» 
 
 They did. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 2 Pers. Do, or. Do Ihou or you. 2 Per*. Do, or, Do yo or 
 
 vo"; 
 
DEPEOTIYE A^EEBS. 
 
 49 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Participles. 
 
 { 
 
 Fresent. To do. 
 
 Present. Doing. 
 Fast. Done. 
 
 Parse tlie following sentences :— 
 
 Exercise 55. 
 
 Twfld He hag We are. You do. They had. I am. He 
 
 is Th; king had A cat was. They are. Thou dost. Sorrow 
 
 i • f have^We did. You are. Thou wast. He does. You 
 
 / Tfla She had Thev do. James has. We were. He 
 
 did Hav V >^si Ee. He intends to be. Allow him to have 
 
 swTheTookseller has the book. You did it. Begin to 
 
 ^thework Peter had a knife. The farmers have horses. The 
 
 stones were He waf I had a little daughter She proposes to 
 
 hZlslll The precentor strives to be. No hope of fame was 
 
 nhlm Two idet figures were within the room. He was to 
 
 p akiol BTttiou'at peace in thy ^ngliter lot l)o your 
 
 duty; Ou the 12th August it ceased to be. I had a friend. 
 
 DEPECTIYE VEEBS. 
 
 127 The following verbs have only two parts, the 
 Present and Past Indicative. Hence they are called 
 Defective Verbs. As they are always used with 
 other verbs, iUj are called Auxiliary, or Helping 
 Verbs. Have, be, and do are sometimes auxiliaries. 
 
 Indicative Moodj 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 1. Fers, I f yf ca" must, .hall, 1. Fers. ^^^^^ --*' 
 
 2. „ Thou mayest, canst, 2. „ ^-^^-^.^X 
 
 must, Shalt, wilt, or, ^^^^* Biiaii, wm 
 
 You may, cm, must, ; 
 
 ,r_^^^^A'„^^^l„„ w^nof. a. Thev may, can, mus* 
 
 o, ,, iiu inii-j, «;an, i^u^.., -- - __ - ... 
 
 shall, will 
 
 shall, will. 
 E 
 
50 
 
 ENGLISH GBAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 I 
 
 2. 
 
 8. 
 
 it 
 
 »i 
 
 >i 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 1. Pers. I might, could, must, l.Pers. We might, could.must, 
 should, would 
 Thou mightest, couldst, 2, 
 must, shouldstjWouldst, 
 or, You might, could, 
 must, should, would 
 He might, could, must, 3. 
 should, would 
 
 They have no infinitive, no imperative, and no participles. 
 
 Note. — Teachers who do not prefer the simple 
 Anglo-Saxon method of treating the verb, but would 
 rather have the more complex method useful for 
 Latin, etc., will now pass to No. 135, where they 
 will find it fully treated. 
 
 should, would 
 Ye or you, might, 
 could, must, should, 
 would 
 
 They might, could, 
 must, should, would. 
 
 THE PABTICIPLES. 
 128. The Present Participle always ends in in^. 
 
 Care must be taken to distinguish between the present parti- 
 ciple and adjectives ending in ing. 
 
 Ex. — He is performing astonishing work. 
 
 What is spoken about ? He. 
 What is said about he 7 Is performing. 
 What is he performing ? Work, 
 What kind of work ? Astonishing, 
 
 a sim. pers. pron., 3rd pers., sing., masc, nom. or 
 
 subj. to is. (Rule I.) 
 an aux. verb, 3rd pers., sing., pres., ind., agr. with he. 
 (Rule II.) 
 
 performing a trans, verb, pres. part, 
 astonishing an adj., qual. work. (Rule IV.) 
 
 work a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., obj. hjperfoi'ming, 
 (Rule III.) 
 
 Exercise 56. 
 
 The time is passing. The wind was blowing. He waits to 
 watch the stars. The corn was growing in the field. The dew 
 is falling. Frederick was sending an army. Bhe king of France 
 
 He 
 
 is 
 
THE PAETICIPLES. 
 
 61 
 
 ^ nl^ hrinS much^BpoU. He rushed into the street, shout- 
 I^^gXtSS^^^^^^ entered the vessel The p^- 
 
 orims leaving for the Holy Land, entered the vessel. ihe 
 Kators beheld the sun. The spectators, standing on the 
 S's edge beheld the setting sun. The passengers saluted the 
 Sn/ri^ng along the street. The highwayman, flourishing a club, 
 
 A^ enemy Tp\Vn?BUch courage, 'refused to retreat. The 
 Shades ravening gathering o'er us, warned us to return along 
 
 to his house. 
 
 129. Tlie Past Participle generally follows some 
 
 part of tlie verb To have or To he. 
 Care must be taken to distinguish between the past tense anrl 
 
 past pai-ticiple ; as. He Ugan, He has begun. 
 Ex.— He has read his lesson. 
 "What is spoken about ? He. 
 "What is said about he ? Has read. 
 "What has he read? Lesson. 
 Whose lesson ? His. 
 Ho a Sim. pers. pron., 3rd pers., sing., masc, nora. or sul>j. 
 to has. (Rule I.) . , ... , ^ 
 
 has an aux. verb, 3rd pers., sing., pres., md., agr. with he. 
 
 (Rule 11.) 
 
 read a trans, verb, past participle. 
 
 his a Sim. pers. pron., 3rd pers., sing., masc, poss., possess- 
 ing lessan. (Rule V.) ^ 
 
 lesson a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., obj. by read. (Rule HI.) 
 
 Exercise 57. 
 
 <rh^ n.rk has. The clerk has written. The ship was wrecked. 
 Tirestorm has ceased. He is risen The .^ f »^"^«£., ^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 dued. The wheat is sown. The walls have fallen. The petition 
 
62 
 
 ENGLISH GHAMMAB AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 ■ 
 
 was granted. He granted the petition. They had forgotten th§ 
 order. Our quiet neighbourhood was preferred. They preferred 
 our quiet neighbourhood. Call your coachman. The heroic deed 
 had deserved all praise. The happiest days are passing. The 
 guests were invited to celebrate her twentieth birthday. We are 
 looking for you. The trouble of the business prevented the en- 
 joyment of it. The priest's prayers were followed by a solemn 
 silence through the whole house. He sent to inquire. Struck 
 by the resemblance, he sent to inquire. He, struck by the re- 
 semblance, gent to inquire. Bereft of all his friends, he died. 
 Weakened by long confinement, he confessed. A stranger, stand- 
 ing under the shade, saw the whole proceedings. A poor woman, 
 clothed in rags, came hobbling to the door. Knowing these 
 things, you promiss to keep them to yourself. The lion, wounded 
 by a shot, turned with desperate ferocity upon the hunters. He 
 found an old coin buried in the earth. We ourselves have ex- 
 amined yours. Ours has failed. Try mine. 
 
 130. Two participles often succeed each otliei.' in 
 
 tlie same sentence. 
 
 Ex. — The race has been gained; The house is being built. 
 
 What is spoken about ? The race. 
 
 What is said about the race ? Has been gained. 
 
 The a dist. adj., qual. house. (Rule IV.) 
 house a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., nom. or Bubj. to is. 
 (Rule I.) 
 is an aux. verb, Srd pers., sing., prea.time, iud. mood, agr. 
 with house. (Rule II.) 
 being an aux. verb, pres. participle, 
 built a trans, verb, past participle. 
 
 Exercise 58. 
 
 He has been. He has been neglected. The horse is beinj; 
 sold. The soldiers have been driven from the batteries before the 
 city. Everything is lost. The chair was taken at eight o'clock. 
 The tide is ebbing. The children had been satisfied with the 
 entertainment. His remarks were concerning the nation. Be- 
 Innd the rocks at the mouth of the glen, you see the ruins of the 
 old fort. Write every najne, to prevent mistakes occurring. Wo 
 see him entering the chapel. The castle had been deserted be- 
 fore his arrival. The disguised knight was to appear, playing a 
 lute.^ The waters were gliding to the sea. The chief's son was 
 appointed to lead the clan to the war. A canal was being formed 
 at that time. The little band of England's bravest soldiers was 
 observed crossing the bottom of the ravine to reaoia i^ixe oppoy^'O 
 
THE PAETlCIPIiES. 
 
 53 
 
 otten th« 
 preferred 
 roic deed 
 Qg. The 
 
 We are 
 d the en- 
 a solemn 
 
 Struck 
 7 the re- 
 he died, 
 er, stand- 
 p •woman, 
 ng these 
 wounded 
 ;ers. He 
 have ex- 
 
 tliGi.' in 
 huilt. 
 
 bj. to U. 
 lood, agr. 
 
 is being 
 lefore the 
 t o'clock. 
 with the 
 on. Le- 
 ns of the 
 ng. Wo 
 erted he- 
 playing a 
 i son was 
 g former) 
 liers was 
 oppoy><i 
 
 ours. Watch theira. 
 
 for the Past Participle. 
 
 Correct tlie following sentences :— 
 
 Exercise 59. ^ . . . . 
 
 He rung the bell. He begun to sleep ^^^^^^'J^^ 
 They done it. James ^^^f ^^ ^^|^''- r^^^ sailor sunk beneath 
 song. You drunk some of the mii^. ^^ .^ok. You have 
 the'waves. The first boy has wiote ^^^ ^opy ^^ i^^. a. fish 
 
 broke the glass shade. ^^ J^Jf^fd T^^ ^^^^^^.^* 
 
 sprung from the wat^r The 1^^^^^^^^^ ^.^^^ The mi- 
 
 has rose m price. My canary "ti» ^^^ ^^^^ ^^.^eg, 
 
 nister hr,s went from tbe church '1^^^''%^^^ ,,ttie were drove 
 
 We seen two meteors. Ti^^^y/^^f^^^'.X I buyed a horse, 
 into a field. Peter has shook the table. J. puj 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XL 
 1*^2 Ex-1 The officer is standing in the door. 
 
 lighted taper in his hand. 
 
 1 . The officer 
 
 2. Our king (sim. siCbj^ 
 
 having ovorwrougM 
 himself {cnlargemQnt 
 ofsuhj.) 
 8.1 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 lis standing 
 
 has been 
 ordered 
 
 nee 
 
 Completion of Prcd. 
 
 to leave {oT)j.) 
 the affairs of state 
 for a few wecl^s (en- 
 largemcntof ohj.) 
 
 holding a lighted ta- 
 per {enlargement of 
 obj.) 
 
 Extension 
 of Prcd. 
 
 in tlio door 
 
 (place) . 
 
 for the sake 
 
 of his health 
 
 {cause). 
 
 Analyze in a Bimilar maniior Eiercbea 57 and 58. 
 
64t 
 
 ENGLISn GEAMMAB A2^D ANALYSIS. 
 
 • i 
 
 t 
 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD WITHOUT TO. 
 
 133. Syntax.— Rule VIII.— lb, the sign of the Infi- 
 nitive, is always omitted after the auxiliary verbs 
 shall, will, may, can, must, and do ; as, I shall go : that 
 is, I shall to go. I can go : that is, I can to go, or, 
 I am able to go. 
 
 Note. — Shall and will express a jpj'eseni intention to do Bome- 
 tbing at another time, and hence they are present tenses. 
 
 Ex. — I shall go. 
 
 What is spoken about ? J. 
 What is said about I? Shall go. 
 
 a sim. pers. pron., 1st pers., sing., eith., nom. or subj. to 
 
 shall. (Rule I.) 
 an aux. verb, 1st pers., sing., pres., ind., agr.with J.(Eule II.) 
 an intrans. verb, infinitive, after shall. (Eule VIII.) 
 
 Shall 
 go 
 
 Exercise 60. 
 
 She will remain. You may leave. I should read. They did 
 approach. All men must die. We should love. We should love 
 our neighbour. The revelation will destroy Peter's peace of mind. 
 The whole earth is filled with wonders. He will come in time to 
 see the beginning of the day's sports. You must attend to your 
 instructions from them. Thou dost arise. No passing bell doth 
 toll. Death doth keep his state beneath that beggar's roof. Every 
 person must recollect the tragical story of young Emmett. The 
 expedition may fail from want of provisions. I shall be. I shall 
 be observed. We might have. We might have been. We might 
 have been lost. The letters must have been intercepted. Lift 
 the heart. Bend the Icnee. Be pleased. The inventor should 
 have been admitted to witness the first trial of his machine. The 
 warrior will ask the haughty king to free his sire. The ocean's 
 bosom was ruffled by a gentle breeze. No person will dwell in 
 that cottage. The row of trees should have been allowed to stanc? 
 fronting the mansion. Track the deep sea. You must havft 
 passed him walking by the side of his horse. He must delight in 
 virtue. I did send to you for gold to pay my legions. A friend 
 should bear his friend's infirmities. The children shall run to 
 lisp their sire's return. Durst you have tempted him? Thou 
 didst hate him. Must I observe you ? You might have seen an 
 old man wandering in quest of something. The traitors lurk in 
 the Christian's hold. After a brief interval, the sovereigns re- 
 quested of Columbus a recital of his adyenturos. You can per- 
 
PEEFECT TENSE. 
 
 65 
 
 «i« a small ftagment of t\« '-- 9\tnrb°eera»^^^ 
 at Corurma „n the ^^Xl^^^^ller l^thiLvBe o£ his expe- 
 
 viage could have been procured «t the nearest inn. 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XII. 
 
 n4 Ex-l The cHld iniglit have died. 2. Shall 
 I +U tpn 9 3 T^rom all these candidates, a 
 
 Ta carSu^^^^^^ their various antecedents. 
 
 C<mpletion\ ^xtensim of Fred. 
 of Fred. 
 
 Sul^ect. 
 
 1. The child 
 
 2. We 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 might have died, 
 shall bring 
 
 d, A man, (sm. might have been 
 
 . V 1 ftnr. 
 
 the pen. 
 
 subj,) hav- 
 ing higher 
 qualifications, 
 [enlargement 
 of suhj.) 
 
 got 
 
 by a careful in- 
 quiry into their 
 various antece- 
 dents, (manner) 
 from all these can- 
 didates i^lace). 
 
 Analyze in the same manner Exercise 60. 
 
 Note.-Teachers who ^o not wish in the mean time 
 to take up the more complex form ot the veih, aie 
 requested to pass on to No. 154i. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 ^-if^^l^fjrf Jr;Xtran action happe.bg 
 at the ^re^^Bt time." The Paet is used to e.pre.s an 
 action that occurred at a tuno now past. 
 
 fill 
 
50 
 
 1*f' ' 
 
 ENaniSJI GllAMilAlt AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 133. TJie Perfect denotes au action begun at a past 
 time, and now finished. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1 Fers. I have loved 1 Pe?'5. We have loved 
 
 „ Thou hast loved, or, 2 ,, 
 You have loved 
 He has or hath loved 
 
 2 „ Thou hast loved, or, 2 „ Ye or you have loved 
 
 You have loved 
 
 3 „ He has or hath loved 3 „ They have loved. 
 
 Repeat in tlie same way the Perfect Tense of tlie 
 verbs move, f tern, secure, trust, forget, arise, see, intend, 
 command, sell, shoiv, he. 
 
 Ex.— The king has seen his father. 
 What is spoken about ? The king. 
 Wliat is said about the king ? Has seen. 
 Whom has he seen ? Father. 
 Whose father ? His. 
 a dist. adj., qual. king. (Rule IV.) 
 a noun, Urd pars., sing., masc, nom. or subj. to has 
 
 seen. (Ptule I.) 
 a trans, verb, 3rd pers., sing., perfect tense, ind., a^r. 
 with king. (Rule II.) ^ 
 
 a Sim. pers. pron., 3rd pers., sing., masc, poss., poa- 
 sessmg father. (Rule V.) 
 
 ^ (R^ule'llil ^'^^^*' ^"'°*' ^^^^•' ^^'^' ^^ ''"^ ^^^^' 
 
 TllG 
 
 king 
 has-seen 
 
 his 
 father 
 
 Exercise 61. 
 
 John has-moved the table. The soldiers have-retreated. The 
 rain has fallen. A sailor has died. We have waited for you. 
 I have completed my twelfth year. The day's work has exhausted 
 him. I hava written a long letter to my parents. Have you 
 seen the picture ? The eventful day has arrived. The avera-o 
 rent of land has increased. Full fifty years have passed. He 
 has bound a snow-white plume upon his gallant crest. Mav- 
 enne hath turned his rein. I have passed a miserable night. 
 iUy mother hath gone from her cares to rest. They have left the 
 fern by the spring's^ green side. I have from my father gone. 
 Hath my word lost its power on earth ? The light of other days 
 has faded. Have the ofiflcers discovered the source of the evil? 
 All these thmgd have in one ahort week disappeared. 
 
FUTUEE AND FUTUREPEEFECT. 
 
 67 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 137. The Pluperfect Tense denotes an action aa 
 ^ast before another past action has happened. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 Singular. ^ ^ ,,^ P^f- . 
 
 IPers, Ihadioved 1 Pen. We had loved 
 
 2 „ Thou hadst loved 2 „ Ye or you had loved 
 
 or, You had loved 
 
 3 ,, He had loved 3 „ They had loved. 
 
 Eepeat in the same way the pluperfect tense of each 
 of the verbs move, turn, secure^trust, forget, arise, &c. 
 Ex.— The child had cut his finger. (See 136.) 
 
 The a dist. adj., qual. child. (Rule IV.) 
 child a noun, 3rd pers., sing., masc, nom. or subj. to had cut. 
 
 bad cut a trans! verb, 3rd pers., sing., pluperfect, ind., agr. with 
 child. (Rule II.) 
 hia a Sim. pers. pron., 3rd pers., sing., masc, poss., pos- 
 sessing ^w^er. (Rule V.) 
 finger anoun,3rdpers.,Bing.,neith.,obj.by?ia(icMt.(Rule iii.J 
 
 Exercise 62. 
 
 The doff had-loved his master. Your brother had-secured a 
 seat. You had-forgotten to give an answer. Robert Ferguson 
 has written the last exercise. A good, long race had- done it. 
 That splendid animal has broken from its keeper. The woitly 
 Abbot of Aberbrothock had placed that bell on the Inchcape Rock. 
 Years had passed since that event. The last consideration had 
 touched her heart. Had you arranged for that meetmg ? Sorrow 
 had overpowered her. His ambition had led him to aspire to 
 universal dominion. Had they seen the building ? In the garden 
 ours was found by himself. Read hers. 
 
 Future and Futureperfect Tenses. 
 138. The Future Tense denotes that an action will 
 take place at a future time. The Futureperfect 
 Tense' denotes that an action wiU be past betore 
 another future action begins. 
 
•1 II 
 
 it 
 
 08 
 
 KNGLISn GllAMMAfl AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 i^^uture Tense. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1 Pevic I shall or will love 1 Pers. "We shall or will IotJ 
 
 2 „ Thou shalt or wilt love, or, 2 „ Ye or you shall o\ 
 
 You shall or will love will love 
 
 8 „ He shall or will love 3 „ They shall or 
 
 loye. 
 
 Tutureperfect Tense. 
 
 1 Pers, I shall or will have loved 1 Pers. We shall or will havel 
 
 loved 
 
 2 „ Thou shalt or wilt have 2 „ Ye or you shall oi\ 
 
 loved, or^ You shall or YnW have ioved 
 
 will have lo-^ ■ d 
 
 8 
 
 it 
 
 He shall or will have loved 3 
 
 „ They shall or will| 
 have loved. 
 
 Repeat the Future and Futureperfeet tenses of see,\ 
 move, turn, forget J secure, command, awaJce, ring, &c. 
 
 Exercise 63. 
 
 The day will-come. The day will-have-come. You shall-return, 
 Will you return ? Will he delay ? I shall-have-left before that 
 hour. Heavenly thoughts shall counsel her. A wise man will 
 make haste to forgive. No tomb shall plead for remembrance to 
 thee. Other Romans shall arise. Give strength to reach yon 
 shore. The angel of vengeance shall see the red stain. Shall I 
 meet you at the station ? We will-have-occupied that villa. No , 
 one mil dwell in that cottage. We shall enumerate the principal | 
 figures of speech. Thou shalt have no other gods before me. 
 Commerce shall have greatly increased by that date. Before 
 Saturday I shall have matured all my plans. You will alter 
 theirs. 
 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 
 139. !Four moods have now been noticed, namely, 
 the Indicative, Imperative, Infinitive, and Participles, 
 
 The fifth mood is the Potential, which expresses 
 the possibility, power, or obligation to do an action. 
 It has four tenses : present, past, perfect^ and ph- 
 'perfect. 
 
POTEi^TIAL MOOD. 
 
 nd 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 ITers. I ry!!ran. ormuat love 1 Pers. Wej^ay. can. or must 
 
 ,. Thou mayst, canst, or 2 ,. ^^ or you m.y. cm, or 
 must love,or,You may, i^^st love 
 
 can, or must love Thevmay, can.or must 
 
 He may, can, or must jJ n xneymujr.vwu, 
 
 love 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 iV.. I might, co^Jd, would,or 1 ^.n. We migR jo^^^^^^ 
 
 I) 
 
 H 
 
 should love 
 Thou mightest, coulclst, 2 
 wouldst, or shouldst 
 love, or, You might, 
 could, would, or should 
 
 love 
 He might, could, would, S 
 or si auld love 
 
 would.orshouldlove 
 Ye or you might, 
 could, would, or 
 should love 
 
 »i 
 
 They might, could, 
 would, or should 
 love. 
 
 Eepeat the Present and Past Potential of the verba 
 mveSurn, arise, see, forget, call, sing, lelieve. 
 
 Exercise 64. (See 136.) 
 
 Youmav-ro. I shall-speak to you. The inquest has taken 
 blace Thou wilt leave us. They shall rest in their graves 
 fchei" had heard the heavy firing in the mornmg. They could 
 &e smoke of battle. Havelock had determined to relieve the 
 
 Sg g^Son. The troops rg^^^-fri^SL S^^^^^^^^^^ 
 ITou can4race a continuous line from station o station Shou d 
 
 he claim a victory ? Napoleon would ^^^^^^f", ^,.^^\^^^^^^^^^ 
 come to his object. His history may ^^^f ^^^^^f ^\^^^^^^^ ^^ 
 
 ient to the edge of the precipice. , I^.^P^^^l',f/,,T'\^SX 
 ■Vouldst thou wed me ? Must I pme "^ my fetters ? Would you 
 .owthe spell? The little -aid woul^^^^^^^^^^ 
 conquered, i go to prepare luu noar=e lOx j^'" "- .-- ^ 
 
 ■\x your testy humour ? Antwerp's monks may sing a mas« 
 by poor spearmen's souls. 
 
GO 
 
 KNGLISU GRAMMAU AND ANALYtiia. 
 
 J 
 
 I 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 „. 7 Plural* 
 
 1 Pers. iSTcan. or mu.i have 1 Pers. ^Ye rnay, can.or muet 
 
 2 Thrmayst canst, or 2 „ Y. or you may, can, or 
 ^ " iZthave loved, or, must have loved 
 
 You may, can, or must 
 have loved 
 
 140. The 
 
 Utates tlio C( 
 
 hi 18 alvvay 
 
 Like the In 
 
 8 
 
 ti 
 
 Ho may, can, or must 8 „ 
 have loved 
 
 They may, can, (w| 
 mus*" have loved. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 1 Pers. I might, could, would, or 
 should have loved 
 
 II 
 
 11 
 
 Thou mightest, couldst, 
 wouldst, or shouldst 
 have loved, or. You 
 might.could, would, or 
 should have loved 
 
 He might, could, would, 
 or should have loved 
 
 1 Pers. "We might, coulJJ 
 would, or Bhouldl 
 have loved 
 Ye or you miglii.i 
 could, would, or I 
 should have loved 
 
 It 
 
 »» 
 
 They might, could, I 
 would, or Bhouldl 
 have loved. 
 
 Sinfi 
 
 i 1 Pers. [If) I 
 
 2 „ (//) ^ 
 lov 
 
 3 „ (r/)i 
 
 ll Pers. {If) 
 
 2 „ m 
 
 lo^ 
 1 3 „ {If) 
 
 [IPcrs. {If) 
 
 Eepeat tlie Perfect and Pluperfect Potential of the 
 verbs move, see, forget, slioio, turn, command, awaU^ 
 gain, slay. 
 
 ExCiXise 65. (See 136.; 
 You must-have-made a mistake. , They migl^t-haye-claimea 
 him. The committee should-have-visited you. Can he have 
 W^tten ? The landlord would have acted m a different manner. 
 Mv 8 ep night break your rest. Shall they live ?_ I had forgotte 
 Ke?! names. 1 roor miser had occupied it. Should sue 
 a respectable man have taken any pa^t m such crimes ?T 
 wretched creature may have died from exposure^ ^.^ '^ 
 will overtake them. The gong had alarmed them. You niU| 
 Le more care. The glass must have fallen since yeste daj.^ 
 We would have despised your aisistance. Bring your sou to Sc= : 
 the diorama. Jane has omitted to lock my desk. Will you da 
 it ? Search every nook. You must have burnt lers. 
 
 AVm. {If] 
 
 TPtTS. {If 
 
 I Pers. {If 
 
 Eepea 
 iwouv., go 
 awalce. 
 
ii 
 
 BUBJtmCTIVE MOOB. 
 
 61 
 
 ' 11 
 
 [it, COUlCiJ 
 
 or Bhouldj 
 ecT 
 
 ou migliiJ 
 •would, or] 
 iave loved 
 
 ght, could. 
 or BhouW| 
 red. 
 
 itial of tlie 
 id, awah, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 I 140. The sixth mood is tho Subjunctive wlucli 
 
 I Like the Indicai' 3, it has six tenses. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 , PZitral. 
 
 Sinflular. (in we love 
 
 1 P.r.^ (rn I love 1 ^'^»'^- W ^^^^ 
 
 12 „ (//) thou love, or you 2 ., ^^ > i^.^. 
 love »* f» \Jf 
 
 13 „ (I/) be love 
 
 Past Tense. 
 
 IP-M/nilovoa ^/-'I^JyToo- loved 
 
 12 „ (i/)U.^ouloved,oryou 2 ,. ^l^^^l^^,^ 
 
 3 „ (I/) ho loved 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 , „ , 1 pprs (If) we have loved, 
 
 1 Pcrs. (I/) I have loved, 1 i «r«- ^^J) ^ ^^^ 
 
 ' &c. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 1 Pcrs. m I had loved, 1 Pcrs, {If) v.e had loved, 
 
 &c. 
 
 &c. 
 
 Pnture Tense. 
 
 lave-clairaedl 
 Jan he have 
 rent manner. 
 lad forgotten I 
 Should sucli 
 dmes? The 
 Calamitio3 
 . You must] 
 36 yesterday, 
 ur Bou to ses 
 Will you do I 
 
 3. 
 
 , , 11 -m^ir* 1 Ppra fl^ we shall 01' 'willlove, 
 irm. m I shall or wiUlove, 1 Peis. {i ) w ^^^ 
 
 &c. 
 
 rutnreperfect Tense. 
 
 loved, ^0. 
 
 &c. 
 
 ■P nnf +1iP Subjunctive Mood of the verbs turn, 
 ' . ~ , . _. .x- i\T«ft(i will hA ffiven 
 
62 
 
 ENGLISH GEAMMAE AND ANALT&TS. 
 
 t ^f>.n(^ \ 
 
 141 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 2nd Person. 2nd Person. 
 
 Love, or, Love thou or you. Love, or, Love ye or yon. 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 Present, Perfect. 
 
 To love. 
 
 To have loved. 
 
 Present, 
 Lovinf?. 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Loved. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Eaving loved. 
 
 Eepeat the Imperati-^e and Infinitive moods, and 
 the Participles of the verbs ttmi, move, go, see, forget}^ 
 call, praise, sing, rise, command. 
 
 Ex.— They, having seen the performance, declared their 
 
 Fatisfactiou. 
 
 a sim. pers. pron., 3rd perg., plu., both, nom. or 
 
 subj. to declared. (Rule I.) 
 a trans, verb, perfect participle, 
 a noun, 3rd pers., sing, neith., obj. by having 
 
 seen. (Rule IIL) 
 a trans, verb, 3rd pers.. plu., past, ind., agr. with 
 
 they. (Rule IL) 
 a sim. pers, pron., 3rd pers., plu., both, poss., 
 
 possessing satisfaction. (Rule V.) 
 a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., obj. by declared, 
 
 (Rule in.) 
 
 Exercise 66. 
 
 Mount thy good steed. The reward ought to-have-cme to you^ 
 He departed. He, having given his instructions, departed. 
 Standing on this spot, I must recall my country's glories. Loved 
 by the whole inhabitants, he died regretted by the whole inhabi- 
 tants. She hath taken the babe to l^er quiet breast. My mother 
 sings, at the twilight's fall, a song of the hills. Come with mo 
 to the vineyard. The wretch, living, shall forfeit fair renown. 
 Stained with blood, the corporal managed to crawl to the nearest 
 tent. Having heard the report, he hastened to contradict it. 
 Haste my father's heart to cheer. I dwell ou blessings ileil. 
 Seek yonder brake beraaia the cliff. Rest thee. Stop. Induced 
 by these fair promises of gain, the miserly knight embarked a 
 
 They 
 
 having seen 
 performance 
 
 declared 
 
 their 
 
 satisfaction 
 
n. 
 
 Q or yon. 
 
 COMPLETE VEBB. 
 
 68 
 
 i„«e .urn in the speculation ^hey have cangM ^^^^^ 
 
 gLg his way thr-l^,^^^^^^^ fm- 
 
 the gauntlet, he defied any man oi t , ^ jf^^^i^g near its trow 
 
 tbat. Scaling ^'>^„^:^2f L^er^^^^^^ that step, he sold all 
 
 o'er the abyss. Having ff ^^"^^^ ' of the hills for some time, 
 H3 lands. Having sought the shelte^^^^^^ Enraged at their 
 
 he managed to subsist «,»„^^^'„ ^SoJintry with a^ ^^^^^ 
 dreadful ravages, he ^""'^^hJ^rXm ^fe ought to have left 
 intending to sweep .everything before mm. v b ^^^^^^^ ^^^^,^ 
 
 'in time. The soldiers expected Jo^f^.^'f '^^ning. Struck with 
 
 la' nocn. You might have ^elaye^.^"J ^rning ^^^^.^^ ^^ 
 
 J he beauty of the scene, he determined t. bu a ^^ ^^^^^^ ,^1 
 
 '-''' h :&s^«-If^'s^^^^^^^^^^ ^ou yourself must 
 
 ^o^i^^'^^flleaveours.* 
 w,forgem 
 
 142. 
 
 COMPLETE VEBB. 
 Indicative. ^^t^^*^^^' 
 
 Present 
 Fast 
 
 Terfect 
 Tluferfect 
 
 Future 
 
 I love 
 I loved 
 
 I have loved 
 I had loved 
 
 I may, can, or must love 
 
 I might, could, would, or should 
 
 I m°ay, can, or must have loved 
 I might, could, would, or should 
 have loved 
 
 Future I shall or will love 
 
 Fmnperfectl Bh^ll or mllh^y^love^ 
 
 SuDjunctive. Imperative. Infinitive, -rtxciples. 
 
 P.MI/) nove retSu TO love Loving 
 
 ^ or you, etc. ^^^^^ 
 
 Fast (I/) I loved To have loved Having loved. 
 
 Ferf. {if) I have loved, etc. -lo ^^^^ 
 
 ir renown, 
 the nearest 
 itradict it. 
 isings ileii. 
 . Induced 
 mbarked a 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON SIII. ^ 
 
 143 BX.-YOU had sent the wrong "°^l°^f,^ 
 porter wiU call to take your luggage. I shall have 
 
54 
 
 EITGLTSH GEAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 Uii ' 
 
 dined by six o'clock. They may have seen your 
 father. A machine might perform that part of the 
 work. He, liaving ascended the platform, made a| 
 telling speech. I saw him coming. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 Comp. of 
 Fred. 
 
 Exten. of Fred. 
 
 You 
 
 had sent 
 
 the wrong box 
 
 to us {place). 
 
 A porter 
 
 ■will call 
 
 
 to take your luggage 
 {cause). 
 
 I 
 
 shall have dined 
 
 
 byBixo'clock(fi'mtf). 
 
 They 
 
 may have seen 
 
 your father. 
 
 
 A machine 
 
 might perform 
 
 that part (obj.) 
 
 of the work 
 
 {enlarg.ofobj.) 
 
 
 He (subj.) 
 
 made 
 
 a telling 
 
 
 having 
 
 
 speech. 
 
 
 ftscendecl 
 
 
 
 
 the platform 
 
 
 
 
 {enlarg. of 
 
 
 
 
 subj.) 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 saw 
 
 him {obj.) 
 coming (j.,. 
 larg.ofobj.). 
 
 
 Analyze Exercises 61, G2, 63, 61, (j5, m. 
 
 VOICE. 
 
 144. The assertion whicli the verb makes about the 
 subject has now been expressed in six ways, c'.Ued 
 moods : Indicative, Potential, Subjunctive, Imperr.- 
 tive, Infinitive, and Participles, The form of the 
 verb which includes all these, as they are given above, 
 is called the Active Voice, because it always reprc 
 sents the subject as the doer of the action j as, 
 James struck the table. 
 
 145. There is another form of the verb, called the 
 Pai-oive Voice, which always represents the subject as 
 the receiver of the action ; as, The table is struck. 
 
'Si 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 65 
 
 146 The Passive Voice of a verb is formed by 
 adding its jpast participle to tbe various tenses of 
 tlie verb To Be. 
 
 147 If the present participle be added to the 
 tenses of the verb To Be, the ProgTCSsive Form ot the 
 verb is obtained. 
 
 148. Conjngate fully each of the tenses of the 
 verb To J^e, aiid of the passive voice oi the verb lo 
 Love, as indicated below. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 Passive Voice Progressive 
 of To Love. Form of 
 
 Conjugation of To Be 
 
 Present 
 
 Past 
 
 Perfect 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Future 
 
 Futureiierfect 
 
 I am, etc. 
 
 I was, etc. 
 
 I have been, etc. 
 
 I had been, etc. 
 
 I shall or v.-ill be, ete. 
 
 I shall or will have been, etc. 
 
 loved 
 
 if 
 
 it 
 >» 
 
 M 
 
 5» 
 
 To Love. 
 
 loving 
 
 t» 
 »» 
 I* 
 
 Li the same manner repeat the Indicative Mood, 
 Passive Voice, of the verbs 7nove, Urn, see, rise, aiva/cc, 
 
 co.iimand. -, r w 
 
 Ex.— The trees had been destroyed to admit hglit. 
 
 a dist. adj., qual. trees. (Rule IV.) ; 
 
 a noun, Ui'd ^crs.-, plu., noith., nom or subj. 
 
 to had been destroyed. (Paile i.) _ 
 a trans, verb, 3rd pers., plu., plupertect, ind., 
 
 pass., agr. with trees. (Kule II.) 
 a trans, verb, pres. , infinitive, active. _ 
 a noun, Brd pers., bing., neith., obj. by 
 
 admit. (Rnle III.) 
 
 The 
 
 trees 
 
 had been destroyed 
 
 to aimit 
 light 
 
 Exercise 67. 
 
 He was-Hllod. They Imve-been-decdvcd. She had been Eccr.. 
 ,. ^ V 11 1 1 oi.n Thfv will-havc-bvcn-summoned. lam 
 ^"''M^^l:^, ito^od .hall b. ont above the luct. 
 Have vou beoa taa'i ma«o ? Alf.cd ,vas eheltercd in the cut »r|.i 
 
 U , 00 cowUerar He bim.eU waa accuHtomed to redo tkui 
 
m 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAE AJSD ANALYSIS. 
 
 t 
 
 etory iu his happier hourg. The British troops were-advancing 
 from Portugal into Spain. Yours has been forgotten. Theirs 
 •will do. Sir John Moore was wounded in the action by a cannon 
 ball. lie shall in that case be punished. Time will have been 
 wasted without any result. They are-coming. We will-be-leaving. 
 Are you mistaken ? The students have been reading some his- 
 torical books. In a few minutes he would have been drowned. 
 By a series of criminal enterprises, the liberties of Europe had 
 
 Are you satisfied ? Will you be passing ? 
 
 been extinguished. 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 >» 
 
 »> 
 
 f* 
 
 u 
 
 149. Potential Mood. 
 
 Verb To Be. Passive Voice. Prog, Form, 
 
 Present I may, can, or must be loved loving 
 
 Past I might, could, would, or 
 
 should be 
 Perfect 1 may, can, or must have 
 
 been 
 Pluperft:t I might, could, would, or 
 
 should have been 
 
 Repeat tlie Potential Mood, Passive Voice, of the 
 verbs move, turn, send, command, tell, iwaise, seekj 
 sJwiv. 
 
 Exercise 68. 
 
 He can-be. He can-be-removed. AVe might-have-been-warned. 
 She could-be-traiued. You must be corrected. They may have 
 been detained. A law might be found to vindicate that measure. 
 The introduction might have been omitted without injury to the 
 sense. It will be proved to thy face. Can you be persuaded to stay ? 
 They are entitled to our gratitude. A cursory examination would 
 enable you to discover the fact. I have been wilting to my 
 friend. This rehc has been preserved for ten years. He should 
 have known tbe reason of his punishment. I expected to have 
 sown my seed on Friday. Shall we close the door ? His listless 
 length at noontide would he stretch. Will he, upon examination, 
 confess his fault? The rain has been falling for some time. 
 Attend to my instructions. Live with your century. He should 
 have been dismissed. You must be forgiven. You might be 
 X)assing. I must be going. 
 
 150. 
 
 Present 
 Past 
 
 f i 
 
 Subjvmctive Mood. 
 
 Vcru To Be. Passive Voice. Prog. Form, 
 
 ilf)'^ bo loved loving 
 
 (i/) I were „ 
 
 And so on, as in the ludicativo. 
 
 u 
 
PASSIYE YOICE. 
 
 67 
 
 Eepeat the Subjunctive Mood, Passive Yoice, o^ the 
 .ovh^ move, turn, sell, command, see. 
 
 The Subjunctive will be treated in Exercise 88, after the Con- 
 junction. 
 
 151. 
 
 Present 
 
 Present 
 Perfect 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Verh To Be. rassive Voice, ^rogM 
 
 Be, or, Be thou or you loved lo^mg 
 
 Infinitive Mood.^^^^^ ^^^.^^ 
 
 To be „ 
 
 To have been »» 
 
 Participles. ^^^^^ ^^^ 
 
 Present Being „ 
 
 Past Been ' „ 
 
 ^/•r/e#« Having been »» , 
 
 ^e/i, shoic, hiow, ivnte. 
 
 Usercise 69. m + i « 
 
 Be-determinea. Be informed a^nt the ^g^g .^^X 
 caught. You must r^xpect to be imin^^^^ They Bought to bo 
 fahited. Be distinguished for S^^^^^^^^^^^ ^Jpg to prove my 
 praised. I love to ^^ reading I ^iH ake b V ^^^^ ^^^^.. 
 
 innocence. Be Pei'^r'^' i'-n Wnted Yo lazy fellow hates to 
 ence appear to have been du^po^e^ I .as stru^. 
 
 Avith the resemblance K;^"^S^^'[,^,\.e,ched their destination, 
 tcncd to the wmdow. They, havin peliqhted ^^ith our loqua- 
 pitched their tent m ^,^^f .f ^^^^^'^inf lat yours. ^Ye have 
 cious friend, v.e regrc tod . fj^^^^i; ™;it . ^ He is weighed in 
 been determining the l^^S^^^^^^^'^f J^^^Sthers have been for- 
 t,be balance. The very ^^^^f .f , ^^^ been inserted. You ought 
 ,.ticn. It may bo ^f P^^^^^fj^^.^e ^e^llilled by yon hosUk 
 to ho.ve attended to it. Gould i^i^^ nave ^.^^^^^ ^^.^j 
 
 ,bo!,? March. Bo prepared. Lndcavoui lo u 
 Lc liave gained his purpose? 
 
 T 2i 
 
68 
 
 
 ■m 
 
 EIiGLISn OUAMMAR AND ANAL IS 13. 
 
 153. COMPLETE VEEB. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 P^resent I love i am loved 
 
 Past I loved I ;vas loved 
 
 ijjUect I hare loved J have been loved 
 
 Plvverfect 1 had loved I had been loved 
 
 future I shall or will love I shall or will be loved 
 
 Futureperfect I shall or wiU have loved I shall or will have been 
 
 loved 
 
 Potential Mood. 
 
 I may love i may be loved 
 
 I might love I might be loved 
 
 I may have loved I may have been loved 
 
 I might have loved I might have been loved 
 
 Preseni 
 Past 
 Perfect 
 Pluj)crfect 
 
 Present 
 Past 
 
 Present 
 
 Present 
 Perfect 
 
 Present 
 
 Pant 
 
 Pr.rfeci 
 
 SulJTinctive Mood. 
 
 WAW''''^ . a/) I be loved 
 
 {If) I loved, etc. (//) I were loved, etc. 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Love, or. Love thou or you Be, or, Be ye or you, loved 
 
 Infinitive Mood. 
 
 ^° 1°^^ , , . To be loved 
 
 To have loved To have been loved 
 
 Participles. 
 
 I^°^"lg Being loved 
 
 Loved 
 Having loved 
 
 Having been loved 
 
 15; 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSOi^ XIV. 
 
 ]<:x.~~IIavmg been warned of Lis dan- r- 
 your .ccoinphco might have been induced to t<;; 
 escape witbont delay, from tlie country. Wo si 
 liu-vo been landed in-- ihi^ fim- \\- ^^ , 
 
 come? "^ ""' ^^'ou^tl you bavv/ 
 
m\ 
 
 nrri5iTiVB mood without 
 
 (( 
 
 to. 
 
 n 
 
 Subject. 
 
 I Pr^d^_±_ComTy^^^ 
 
 69 
 
 Exten. 
 of Fred. 
 
 ■Your accomplice 
 (subj.), having been 
 
 ■warned of Ins 
 
 danger {enlarg. of 
 
 8uhj.) 
 
 Wo 
 
 might 
 
 have been 
 
 induced 
 
 yon 
 
 shall 
 
 have been 
 
 landed 
 
 would 
 have 
 
 coiiie. 
 
 to try {ind. ohj.) 
 to escape -without de- 
 lay, from the country 
 
 {enlarg. of ohj.). 
 
 by that 
 time(tiwie). 
 
 Analyze Exercises 67, 68, 69, as above. 
 
 lOTIOTTIVE MOOD WITHOUT TO. 
 
 tive, is Bot,generallyued after tliejer .^^^^.^^^ 
 
 io need, make, see,* hem , jeei, k", 
 thold oUerve, have,* and Jcnm. 
 
 EX -You b d me speak ; tUat is, Voa bid me to spe.k. _ 
 
 a l^^t..AU -g.. P-»- »^- (-'•'• ''^- '''" 
 
 «ott. (Rule II.) . ,. uy tuL (Rule III.) 
 
 „.e as^m.pron istpers^mg^^ b. Ob .l^y;^^ ^^^ 
 
 Bpeak 1 a trans, verb, pres., mf., vact.J. a*w 
 
 Exercise 70. 
 
 i- u Mnlffl vour bondmen tremble. 
 
 They hea.-a ^m men^^^f J * f LeUimper.) me (to) supply 
 
 1 near thee speak of the better land. Let (i^ I )^^^ K^^^^^^^ j.^ 
 
 you. Let them hear the captivu . v....~. - ^ 
 . To is sometimes used after these verba. 
 
 You 
 
 bid 
 
70 
 
 ETraLisn grammar a:sj) analysis. 
 
 before me. I marked tlie soldier stagger. Did you perceive him 
 leave the house at any time ? You do believe it. Do you see the 
 sliore? Wo do forget to fulfil our duties. Do leave this place. 
 Do speak to me. Your noisy entrance made him omit the fourth 
 pomt. Let me go. Let us worship God. Let them have their 
 own way. I feel to dismiss him. You need not fear. Cease to 
 ao evil. Hast thou a charm to stay the morning star in his deep 
 course ? I feel the pain abate. I dare do anythinf^. I dare vou 
 to do it. He was seen to faU. He must decline. He asked me 
 to repair yours. They themselves saw hers. 
 
 155. The verb To do, used with anotlier verb as an 
 auxiliary, maizes the meaning stronger. This is called 
 the Emphatic Form of the verb ; as, I did say it. 
 
 156. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 You 
 
 ANALYTICAL LE&SON XV. 
 
 Ex. — You bid me j^peak. 
 
 Pred. I Comp.ofPred. \ Exten. of Pred. 
 
 hid I me (direct ohj.) 
 
 speak (inf., indir. ohj.). 
 
 {none) 
 
 Analyze Exercise 70 in '.he same manner. 
 
 FALSE SYNTAX. 
 
 157. Correct any mistakes in the following sen- 
 tences, according to Rules I., II., III., IX. 
 
 Exercise 71. 
 
 We was. Tliou risest. You lisest. He lovest. We loves 
 They loves. The shepherd died. I were. We is. They JaT 
 She were. I gets my money from him. I speaks to himf We 
 has a penny. He do come. They has it. I have some time 
 They was in the street This houses has no windol^ Thoule 
 at homo Yon art. Tl-.nn ir.-rpa+ +^ „i^_. tt- .. •„ i_^ ,. , 
 
 .. ,,, ■■ — -'• -■••'f.^i; lO Diiig. liUii Will TO. Me did 
 
 It. We expects compony. I hears a noise. My slio™ In.rts mv 
 feet. Tl.em were striking me. This treea malfes a fme avenSZ 
 
THE TTSE OF " 10 BE 
 
 tl 
 
 71 
 
 W. enjoy, our,el,e,. The whee U ha, ^'^PP/^men iSta the 
 Zh him. I foi^got' <- '"•"""'aoUt' I «e°fe .mno asristanoe. 
 le^i street. Your omrh-yor 1 »™ /"'itey^naae the rook to »hn^<e 
 He need to attend to his duty. ,, / j ;„ » boot? Shall I 
 m you observe ,''».5''"f *» ^ f %*he.^ "an tell yon. Him mU 
 {(ear yoa to speak "> ^'^^/^^'aislur"" I «iU see him to saw 
 run for your parcel. liKl me t^" "^° vnconnd I cets my dinner. 
 SoUe- He made the^'oo to rewound. J^g^^^ 7^^^^^^ 
 
 We does know about it. Uoes you 
 they. Give this not to he. 
 
 The Use of tlie Verl} To Be. 
 
 158. If thcerb ^^/^' -, ^If.Clt^^^^^^ 
 nominative oy^^^^^^^ ViU also 
 
 coming after It, leterrm ^^ ^^^ ol]ective 
 
 t^re tlTt^ ruf o;%rrouu afte. it will .e iu t.o 
 Objective case. 
 
 « « ^ ^ T?n1e X — TKe verb 2^0 Be takes tlie 
 159. Syntax.— Riiie ^j V;" 
 
 Bamo case after it as before lb. 
 
 Ex.-Solomon was a wise king. 
 
 !^ qvd Tjers sing., masc, nom. or enhj. to was. 
 Sobmon I a noun, 3rd pars., siub » 
 
 a sS'oriltrans. verb, 3rd pers., sing., past, iud., agr. 
 
 mth SoZojnon. (Rule H.) 
 a dist. aaj., qual. /cm^. f^^^";^*' 
 an adj., qual. M^9- P- ^Jj^ ^,^. or Bubj.. the 
 a noun, 3rd pers., bi»o » 
 
 same as Solomon, (l^ule X.) 
 
 Exercise 73. 
 
 The stars are worlds . Thomas -?,,^Taf ^The^^^^^^^^ 
 
 a fine speaker. ^^^^^ ^^'^fif. Ae dn^^^^^^^^ ^^^"^ 
 
 ^^as a mistake. Jessie ^^^^^^' %^ ^i^crs were clergymen 
 victononsgeneralwaahisfothei. ine 1 .^ ^^^^^ He should 
 
 This powder maybe poison " ^^^^ ^ ^ould have been 
 
 be master. They might l^^Tr^.f Httle chil<^ will be heir to broad 
 «,irveyor for the company. ..Tb^t attle cni^^^ ,onsidered her to 
 
 lands: i^okit. 1 ^°^^^;: ".IV'f^^^ 
 
 ^oX. tH: S^n rnTe ptrn ofUe town was a terrible robber. 
 
 was 
 
 a 
 
 wise 
 king 
 
 ■i 
 
72 
 
 J-IA'GLISH GE.IMMAB A^D ANALYSIS. 
 
 n mnst haxt t.«en my pen. God ia lovo. Aliab wan IdnR of 
 Ismcl. She will l,e a blo.sing to yon. Trno lovo is a l.nmble, 
 . _^-bom thing That poet wns an empty rhymer. Thou has 
 leit this matter to me. The grain growing in our fiekl was wh a 
 Befoio U.S lay an avenue. It was a line sunny mornin-. I midit 
 
 It was a terrible moment of suspense. They fixed on me to be 
 chairman, t. ,, ^ ^^^^^^ ^^ j^^^.^^^^ J me o be 
 
 houseUeper. Groups of officers were spectator? of tlie s en 
 The murder was no deed of a few minutes. Will you sell me 
 your farm ? The soldier might have been an enemy. ^ TheVesTe 
 commg m sight must be a barque. That old relic oud t to b^ 
 
 L'Sof lS"l o'^l?; ""'"^^ 'r'''^^.^^^^^^'-^ Icat^fTbsenc: oi 
 account of his health, will return in six months. Led by their 
 Bpinted queen, they made a successful retreat. Was it I ? ^We 
 they sailors? Send him to be a lawyer's clerk. Hiswhoirile 
 has been a blunder. Is this hers ? Richard 's himself 
 
 160. Sometimes tlie adjectivo qualifying? the noun 
 or pronoun IS not placed before, but after it, with 
 some part of the verb To JSe. 
 
 Ex.— The horse was strong, 
 a dist. adj., qual. horse. (Rule IV.) 
 
 ^ '(S I) ^''''" ^'''^*' '^''''■' '''''"• ^'^ ^''^J- *° ^'^'' 
 
 ' d Ls?^^ j:^.f ^' '''''" -^^-^ p-*' -^-^ ^^. 
 
 an adj., qual. horse. (Rule IV.) 
 ExercisG 73. 
 
 The boy was good. Her house is comfortable Tbfl oh^iv ic. 
 new. The weather is fine. The sun's heut gre;t The Zo 
 Eion was tremendous. My mother was Kovvr TJ.n n ^ . 
 Scots was beautiful. The attendance will rVmaTl ' fcl ^1 
 lappy _ I shall be happy to see you. E?ery g rf sliouW L 
 mdustnous Our neighbour is a doctor. Her griS is S I? 
 imist bedifticult. Your exercise might have been better ^'vnl 
 
 ummci ot that j...r., Tho moon was higli in a £.;reno sky. 
 
 The 
 
 horse 
 
 ^a'j 
 
 strong 
 
NOUNS IN A1'?03TTI0N. 
 
 73 
 
 Multitudes were busy in the pursuit of bubbles. He was to the 
 Iftst hour the darling of the army. He was, through all hia 
 ticissitudes, the same stern, impatient, inflexible original. The 
 safest study for kings is tlie interest of their people. Washington 
 was untainted with the crime of blood. Ilis advice might be 
 valuable to you. I should have been consulted. She was affec- 
 tionate. A loyal subject is a benefit to society. A subject loyal 
 to bis sovereign is a benefit to society. A boy careful of his book 
 deserves credit. A servant faithful in all his duties should bo 
 encouraged. It would be difficult to find a soldier braver in 
 I battle. This house is mine. Did you buy yours ? I myself am 
 .Uppy. They themselves must bear the burden. Secure me a 
 j ticket. You are like (to) him. That conduct is unlike you 
 Behave like a gentleman. He is not a manager lilie lois father. 
 Tiie soldier acted like a hero. 
 
 \^ 
 
 to vns. ■ 
 
 John 
 
 ind., agr. 1 
 
 the 
 
 1 
 
 coachman 
 
 1 
 
 brings 
 
 chair 19 ■ 
 
 news 
 
 NOIJNS IN APPOSITION. 
 
 161. Syntax. — Rule XI. — Wlien two or more nouns 
 
 come together, signifying the same thing, they agree 
 
 m case. 
 
 Ex. — John, the coachman, brings news. 
 
 a noun, Srd pers., sing., masc, nom. or subj. to brings. 
 
 (Rule I.) 
 a dist. adj., qual. coachman. (Rule IV.) 
 a noun. Srd pers., sing., masc, nom., tho same as 
 
 John. (Rule XI.) 
 
 a trans, verb, Srd pers., sing., pres., ind., (act.), agr. 
 
 ..Ill Jnhn. (Rule II.) 
 a nonn, Srd pers., sing., neith., obj. by brings. (Rule 
 
 III.) 
 
 Exercise 74. 
 
 George, tlie king, formed a new ministry. The steamship 
 {China sailed from England to America. The city Edinburgh is 
 Bituated beside the Forth. Mocha, a place in Arabia, supplies 
 good coffee. Smith the lawyer wrote the will. Tlie Amazon, a 
 [river in South America, has nur.-«erons large tributaries. Saturn, 
 |a god of the old Roman people, gave name to Saturday. The 
 jcity London is the largest town in Europe. Roberis, an expe- 
 jriencc<l detective, was engaged in the pursuit. He admir3a 
 ICbauccr the poet. Tho soTereign invited Turner the painteti 
 

 74 
 
 ENOLTSn OEAMMAR AND ANALTSI8. 
 
 *ia !■ 
 
 -Ml 
 
 TT. Mv^i\ in BosLon a city in the United States. Livingstonft 
 
 ho ortor. Victoria the queen made a proclamation Ban. 
 noclS, the scene of Brace's victory, is m the founty of Stir- 
 Unf \V lliam the Conqueror defeated Kng Harold at Hafltmgs 
 You miS^^ selected the writings of riouthey the poet. JTaye 
 vou rTad tie essay by Macaulay the historian ? Helen's beauty 
 las tie cause of Troy's destruction. The people made Edward 
 king. You named him your successor. 
 
 163 When two possessive cases are in apposition, 
 
 tlic apostroplio is attached only to one of triein, and 
 
 underatood to the other. 
 
 Exercise 75. 
 
 Jones the butcher's house is empty You will ge^^^a^book 
 at Lon 'mar. . the bookseller's (shop). Brown the mmister s s > 
 monsave intellectual. Do you intend to purchase Scott tl o 
 Zelist's poems ? Come to me at Thomson th. hotel-keeper '- 
 ?ooms He resides in Forester's. Give me a letter of mtroduction 
 [o Shnpson, the leather merchant. This picture is Landseer lie 
 paintTi^s. Oar good horse Dobbin will draw us to the foot of 
 the hill. 
 
 163. Sometimes an adject' je is used as if it were a 
 noun In that case the noun is understood ; as, ilio 
 good are happy; that is, The good i?mws are happy. 
 
 " Exercise 76. 
 
 The ^rcat must die. All will be admitted. The just shall liv5 
 by faitl^ Some crept in dead men's sbdls Few are clu);^.^ 
 Sever-d came to see the spot. Blessed are the nicrciful. 1 ho 
 Lad shall rise. He is in the land of the living This must o 
 he wav That is your opinion. The poor ye have gathered o 
 you. Many have been disappointed The wise are governed b 
 their reason. The former will be preferred. This is the shortest. 
 tIS English are great t.-aders. One will do. Both can come 
 All sliould have been explained in a satisfactory manner. Una 
 remains to be done None will dwell nijthat cotUge. Each 
 qbali brin^ two good peus witu iuin. xcw ^m.n ^aii. ,■■—- 
 have al^seited that. He publishe I it to many The gmlty ong 
 to be punished. The noble are to be admired. Give my respecw 
 to all. His is wanted. Can you lend him a pen ? 
 
Ar>TEBB8. 
 
 76 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XVI. 
 
 164. I... *'Ha 'sentences in J:xGrci^^e9 70, 71, 72, and 
 1 73, where tl: ; verb To Pd 1ms a noun or adjcctiv j 
 after it, thr' ')un or ac^.jective is joined Arith tlio verb 
 to form tab predicate. ... « m, 
 
 Ex. -1. Peter is a farmer m America. 2. ihe 
 scenery on tlio river was beantiful. 3. Philip tlie 
 tailor is lazy at >is work. 4. The good are bappy. 
 
 Completion I Extmfilonof 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 1. Peter 
 
 2. The scenery (suhj.) 
 
 on the river [en- 
 larcjcment ofsuhj.) 
 8. Philip tbo tftilor 
 
 4, The good 
 
 is a farnier 
 was beautiful. 
 
 is lazy 
 are happy. 
 
 of Vml. 
 
 rml. 
 
 in America 
 (iplace). 
 
 at hi" ■work 
 (2. .xe). 
 
 (Vnalyzo Exercises 72, 73, 74, 75, 7G. 
 
 ADVEEBS. 
 
 165. Tbo word wbicb tells tbe quality of a noun 
 
 has been called an adjective. Tbe word which tells 
 
 the quality of a verb, or modifies its meaning, is called 
 
 an Adverb. It expresses the cause, time, place, or 
 
 maimer of the action implied by the verb. 
 
 Ex.— She vrritea well. 
 
 How cloes she wiite ? Well. 
 
 It is the writing that is well. 
 
 But lorites is a verb ; hence icell is an artverb. 
 
 166. Syntax.— Rule XII.— Adverbs modify verbs. 
 She a Bim. pers. pron., 3rd pera., ning., fern., nom. or subj. to 
 
 wntcs. (Rule I.) ^ .„, , , ^ __. -.t, 
 
 writea a trans, verb, 3rd pers., sing., pres., iuci., ^act.;, ugr. wii-a 
 
 she. (Rule II.) ^ . 
 
 ' well an adverb of manner, modifying writes. (Rulo Xll.) 
 
iirii 
 
 76 
 
 EifGLISU GRAMMAE AND AN-ALTSIB. 
 
 ;*■■ 'r f- 
 
 Exercise 77. 
 
 They listerx.* They listen attentively. The girl ^ews. Th« 
 eirl sews neatly. The rain poured. The rain ponved incessantly, 
 My new lamp burns brightly. The farmer's extensive fields pro- 
 duco abundantly. They sang swec%. Y^ait patiently. Their masj 
 ter loves to read aloud. You will admit. You will readily adm; t. 
 Yon will readily admit the fact. The boat moved slowly. Tnej 
 succeed. They always succeed. They never succeed. They some- 
 time? succeed. They generally succeed. He sleeps not. Ibe 
 chairman then erolie. He now spoke. He spoke pitlnly. Oui 
 auest then departed. That stranger came hither. Read together. 
 Tlie clergyman only prayed. Come here. Stand still. He has 
 been omitted. He has been already omitted. He has not been 
 omitted. Yoi- are where ?+ Where are you ? You are how ? How 
 are \ ou' Why speak you ? You seldom see her. The parson g 
 house stands among the trees. The parson's house stands snugly 
 amon<^ the tree.g. The vessel has been sailing slowly under steam, 
 for two hours. I hardly think it. The cashier is easily offended. 
 Heraupon he replied to the lawyer. Go away. Speak gently to 
 the unfortunate. His gentle words fell soothingly. They might 
 easily have been left behind rs. He now prepared to speak. 
 The concert can proceed. The concert can not proceed. The 
 concert cannot proceed. Ye may trace my step o'er the waking 
 earth, by the primrose stars in tl^- shadoAvy grass. The gmdes 
 looked eagerly around them lou can doubtless remember the 
 circumstance. Each man of us must go for^Yard. The vine bUII 
 clings to the mouldering wall. Ill fared it then with Rodcrici! 
 Dhu. The birds' feathers were found everywhere. We rardy 
 hear that word in our time. The news [sing.) has just arnvcd. 
 Always remember your duty. Try to live honestly. Never foar. 
 He did indeed. How are yon? How do you do? When shall 
 I Bee you? The shareholders' fine steamer was completely 
 rrecked off the coast of Newfoundland, on the tenth day of May, 
 1847. He wc^s born on the 6th July, 183G. Tiiere came an eve 
 of festal hoars. The place is little changed. I'll not forget old 
 Ireland. I will come to you anon. It is twice blessed. You 
 are the man. Am I wrong? Send me your portrait. I will 
 give him a good situation. She was- much disappointed, ^ow 
 is the time. Run quickly. Did you get the books ? _ Yes. 
 you go now? No. Has your father got a situation? 
 Have you ? No. Let me send you a volume. 
 
 167. Some words, wliicli are prepositions in gome 
 positions, perform tlie oiHccs of adverbs in others. 
 * See No. 81. + See No. 214. 
 
 Can 
 
 Yes. 
 
ADVEEB3. 
 
 77 
 
 When they are adverbs, they can generally be mov^d fr^m °nfl 
 mvt of the sentence to another, without destroynig the Bensc. 
 ^Vhen tl ey a e prepositions, they cannot be so '^oved Ex.- 
 Ti^y pulled doivl the house. They pulled the house down. 
 
 Exercise 78. 
 
 qhP climbed up. You must stand out. He can come along. 
 She clinibea up. X ^.^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^ 
 
 d.Cbridi^ m^^^^ the vale the village bolls ring ro^nid^ 
 
 r?rl cut the wood through. She came on. She came on with a 
 :% f .!^t7. On she came wHh a cloud of canvas. Both the 
 cloud of '^'11'''' ^'l'^^^^^ Then rose from sea to sky the 
 
 ""Z fX;^' Thy omvird way leads up. Tby onward way^leads 
 SoSsoon^Trshalf music swell the breeze. Put on 
 
 ^^J^ 4^ Thus -4t^^s^j^j:s^ 
 
 Z-T^^. ar-n^Hr^^^ Bend yours 
 
 in Bring mine out. I will despatch hers on. 
 
 168 The word wliicli modifies the meaning of an 
 .uljective or otJier adverb is also called an Adverb; as, 
 Much water. Too much water. 
 
 Exercise 79. 
 
 Th(^ voluntoor made a good shot. The volunteer made a very 
 ,oIlUo^ S^oToy eat^ much beef, ^ho boy oa^ too m^^^ 
 
 preen appearance, tie possesses muio j i . , .• 
 
 carpenter has paid more careful attention ^o my "^^^m t^o 
 Y.ir grandfather related a .nost remarkable stoi). The chei b 
 sh.)wc.l an exceedingly brilliant hght. ^ake th east foulty p c 
 ture. The magistrate received our rrejiaen w th a mos heai y 
 welcome The never cGasin- pain was forgotten, kelson lou^i^ 
 ^^^^''°'^®* ,„, Jl L+iip \Ve cive a quite decided opinion. He 
 an ever memoroble battle. v\ ej^ivu " 4 ^ ^^ fripud is 
 
 is the man for the situation. You are very k ml ^"[^^^^^V^^^ 
 a )uOst enterprising fellow. The once beauti ul foim is mouM 
 ••nc in the dust. The merchant may embavk m a ceitai ly 
 ; Lune^ve Strpnse. Yours is the much nicer pattern i^ 
 mintcr has completed an almost perfect work o. ait. Y'^^ ^uU^ 
 amy have brouglit up a positively ^'^^^^ '^^^''^^'1^^;, 
 Ke p back. The truly virtuous man may ^^ «;;";• ^^^ 
 numerous list could have been got uj;. A most ^^^e '^i^ J^^^^^^^ 
 vvouxd ccrtamlv have been nuxde m that n\^^i^^iHn-.^ ^J hat s^ij^^^^^^^^ 
 Teryline. His sermon was too ioug. luo aiu.. .euai>.„ th« 
 
'( 
 
 If ■ ' 
 
 78 
 
 ENGLISH GEAMM'AE AND ANALTSia. 
 
 II I 
 
 ' very best light to take the picture properly. Take her np ten- 
 derly. A house largo enono-h (enough large) could not be got. I 
 This apple is not so good.' She might have been as happy. | 
 Yours will do. She herself must N/rite mine. 
 
 The birds sing sweetly. The birds sing very sweetly. Our I 
 sister died happily. Our sister died so happily. It can be done 
 well. It can be done as well. The train will take you as soon. | 
 The bereaved mother talked so cheerily. You read too quickly. 
 It fell almost immediately. The ambassador departed quite I 
 suddenly. Tlie boy is allowed to spend his time too idly, .he 
 course of lectures has be?n most spiritedly carried out. All eyes 
 were very soon turned m breathless suspense upon the scene. 
 The evidence impressed him too deeply to be soon forgotten. 
 Few words were spoken. Very few words were spoken. So very 
 few words were spoken. A very old stone coffin was quite recently 
 found in a field on a gentleman's eatate. It must be so. Come 
 here to me. The stars may fade away. Sheathe your dagger. 
 Eternal summer gilds them yet. You have the Pyrrhic dance as 
 yet. Forth went they from 'their fatherland. Onward in hasto 
 Llewellyn passed. On went Gelert too. Yonder is a little drum 
 hanging on the wall. We made it run. You yourself bade him 
 come. Having heard so little, I cannot judge. Having been sent 
 on important business, he was unable to stay very long. So it 
 was for many a day. I die here. Hero I die. They go on. On 
 they go. So you say. Down cnmo the blow. There you aro. 
 By the father's hand here shall the child bo proudly led. I will 
 not bear that still, cold look. Thus far into the bowcla of the land 
 liave we marched on without impediment. Bring mo my stecfl. 
 Theirs can wait. Save yourself. A foe is there. There is a foe 
 among you. There he comes. 
 
 Syntax. — Eule XII. — Advcrbg modify verbs, ad- 
 jectiyes, and otlier adverbs. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XVII. 
 
 169. Ex.— 1. Sho spoke clearly. 2. I will certainly 
 come. 3. Speak out. 4<. AVliere aro you ? 5. He 
 yometimeH stumbled. G. He bou'i^lit a very fine 
 piano. 7. You are too kind. 8. XJp rose tbe lark 
 into the sky to sing its morning song. 
 
 1. She 
 
 2.1 
 
 3.You(wrid 
 
 4. You 
 
 5. He 
 
 6. Ho 
 
 7. You 
 
 8. The larli 
 
 Analy: 
 
 170. C 
 
 plu'ases, 
 
 171. 
 
 K 
 
 fl 
 
 ■| 
 
 h.y-X 
 
 K 
 
 ai.ti 
 
 m 
 
 cliO'jri'al 
 
 m 
 
 iire 
 
 W- 
 
 
 
 (DUX.>M 
 
 l.Mw ^0 
 
 ocauLiftU 
 their ton 
 
 'ill 
 
Subject. 
 
 1. She 
 
 2.1 
 
 d.YoM {underst. 
 
 4. You 
 
 5. He 
 
 G. Ho 
 
 7. You 
 
 8. The lark 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 Comp. of Fred. 
 
 Bpolio 
 
 will come 
 
 speak 
 arc where 
 stuinhled 
 
 bought 
 
 are too kincl. 
 
 rose 
 
 a very line piano. 
 
 Analyze Exercises 77, 78, 79. 
 
 79 
 
 Exten. 
 of Fred. 
 
 clearly 
 (manner). 
 certainly 
 (manner). 
 out (manner). 
 
 sometimes 
 [time). 
 
 up (manner) y 
 into the sky 
 (place), ^ 
 to sing its 
 morning song 
 1 (cause). 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 170. Conjimctions are worda that coBnect TV'ords, 
 plirasea, and sentences : Syntax.— Enle .ail. 
 
 A CONJUNCTIONS JOINING WORDS. 
 
 171. 1.' Conjimctions join together Adjectives. 
 
 Ex.— A bright and cheerful firo burns. 
 A 1 a .list, adj., qual. fire. (Rule IV.) 
 
 ournB an MmJs"\'erb, iirdpers., sin-., prcs.. ind., (..:'^}, agr. 
 I viiih/ire. (Kulo 11.) 
 
 Exercise 80. 
 
 ■1 - .ft and warm f.t.r co-.red thn hands. Ti'.c 1-illiant and 
 . ^"r/l^^'^^^'V^^ . .i;.,., \ i) and broad river separates 
 t'^eir territories. A black or blu« . - wi '1 Bin. uim. Vim au« 
 
80 
 
 EKOLISn GRAMMAR AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 good men made the la^vs. The sour and unripe fruit mjured tlie 
 children. The large and spacious hall can bo made to hold 2O0 
 guests. Our civil and religious liberties were won together, h 
 close and bitter contest took place for the office. The clever bui 
 unfortunate engineer gave many ideas for the better construction 
 of steam vcss ?ls. A silent yet certain monitor warns him of his 
 errors. A rich though ungenerous neighbour refused help, 
 Hard or soft water will do. He preached a pithy and eloquent 
 sermon. A good and true son was he. The statesman delivered 
 a long and serious advice. You might purchase a strong ye>, 
 elegant table. The company then partook of a rich and sump 
 tnous banquet. A strange yet forcible example was chosen bv 
 the shrewd and cautious lawyer. The dangers may be easih' 
 averted by immediate and decided action. These tales are not 
 fitted for so spirited boys. He found one new and very interest- 
 ing kind of insect. Their mansion occupies a most delightful and 
 healthy position above the lake. The grand, rugged, and tower- 
 ing peaks are finely shown against the blue and cloudless sky. 
 Bo very little time was given to complete the heavy and costly 
 embankment. He is the person. You must be far too eager. 
 Such a black and watery sky overhung the ship during the most 
 frightful and critical part of the voyage. You were first and fore- 
 most. The potatoes were small and bad. They should bo 
 sweeter and dearer. By ">ng and mighty hand ye shall be 
 
 led out. Your father is -es ectable and honest man. Yours 
 was admired. They wat* ,. ■- - buy mine. 
 
 173. 3. 
 
 uouns. 
 
 174. Sji 
 
 loined to< 
 
 jective, a] 
 
 I 
 
 172. 2. Conjunctions connect adrerbs 
 
 Exercise 81. 
 
 The letter was written neatly and correctly. He gave his 
 opinion shortly and pithily. You drew our plans quickly yet 
 well. She performed the duty so wcil. She performed the duty 
 as well. She performed the duty as* well as willingly. _ We laid 
 him down slowly and sadly. Slowly and sadly we laid him down, 
 She gave her opinion quite distinctly. She gnve her opinion as 
 distinctly. She gave her opinion as distinctly as delicately. Yen 
 will come as soon. Look in now and then. They might have 
 been blown by the wind hither and thither. Meet your diflicultics 
 boldly and honestly. The leaves liad been scattered here and 
 there. The historian was a vivacious and talkative man. Jt 
 returned again and again. They were entering upon the days 
 p.jdtin'^ work cautiously and skilfully. That bright and happ? 
 creature received us warmly and cheerfully. J-ot mo do thi-i. 
 The innocent were immediately dismissed. Watch yourself. 
 
 e Sec No. 2-iO. 
 
81 
 
 COlTJTJNCTIOlfrS. 
 
 173. 3. CoBJunctions join together nouns and pro- 
 
 uouns. 
 
 ri%— YXrS7«.. Boo. U Ob- 
 
 jective, and so is slate. 
 
 ^""'"tlif We might have invited 
 
 The dishes contain vrater '^^^^^"'•r The girl paid three 
 
 Jle and aunt. Bring pens and P^^^^^^ J^ ,,a 
 
 shillings and sixpence J was mten^^^^^^^ ^^^ clay and hour 
 
 ^;^i e Tmutt gathe^ flowers and b^^^^^^ ^,, ^ale. 
 
 'blossoms and the leaves .^'ll'^^ZZlrnle.. Let blessmgs 
 The summer air blows ou the grass an ^ thought of you 
 
 be on hia kindly vmce and on^l^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^.^een the sun 
 and sister dear. Jhe eartli somei ^^^ grassy plots. I 
 
 and the moon. The brook Btea^« hy iaw ^^^ ^^^^ ^ 
 
 Baw an army and a navy. I awjn a^ J ^1^^^ ^^ , ^ 
 
 navy upon the sea. ihe cmeiia ^g nor worth, action, 
 
 Msplaid. I have ^e ther (adJ.)^^^t^ no woi ,^ ^^^^^,^ ^ 
 
 nor utterance, nor ^hc po^r of speccu ^^ ^^ bivnand you. 
 plight mh)e honour, oath, and ^oid^ u -^ ^^^^^^ ^^.^ ^.egin 
 
 She did not visit you or me It is you ^^^^ the harvest 
 
 business with such a man as a partoei. ^^^^J^^^^^^ for you 
 moon. Have you seen ouis?ihie^^ ^^^^ short were th r 
 Mark his wan and hollow cheeKS. ^^^^^^ ^ Gn« 
 
 „5. When the -b^ect'« formed of t.vo or^njore 
 r-he pCr: C» -h.ei will then dc 
 uoue more tlian one. 
 
 , ^TT rr^o or more nonns or 
 
 p.JLnffl;7n^^^e. Joined together by ««4 
 lenuire a verb in the plural. 
 
 
 

 ENGLISH aSAMMAB AND ANALTBIS. 
 
 Ex.— The father and son gained the prize, 
 a noun, 3rd pars., Binp;., masc, nom. or subj., part of 
 
 Bwh}. to gained. (Rule I.) vttt \ 
 
 a conjunction joining father and son. (Rule XIII.) 
 a noun, 3rd pers., sing., masc, nom. or Bubj., part of 
 
 subj. to gained. (Rule I.) 
 a trans, verb, Brd pers., plu. {whij?), past, ind., (act.), 
 
 agr. with " father and son.'' (Rules II., XV.) 
 a noun, 3rd pers., sing., neith., obj. by gained. (Rulo 
 
 III.) 
 
 Exercise 83. 
 
 Fire and smoke enveloped the city. Robert and Tom went to 
 fish in the lake. Time and tide wait for no man. The old and 
 
 62 
 
 Father 
 
 and 
 son 
 
 gainerl 
 
 prize 
 
 X'.X- 
 
 dying man whispered faintly and feebly. Hope and fear axt 
 nately swayed her breast. He and she were lately married.^ The 
 clergyman and his daughter returned from the Continent in tiia 
 beginning of August. Edinburgh and Glasgow are the largest 
 cities in Scotland.' Sugar, tea, and coffee, are sold in very large 
 quantities by that grocer. Interest and ambition urged tlio 
 student on. He always prefers a plain but substantial dinner. 
 A table and two chairs occupied the centre of the apartment. 
 The frosts and rains injured the crops. The frosts of spring and 
 the heavy rains of summer injured this year's crops. The severe 
 frosts of the late spring and the heavy rains of summer injured 
 this year's crops. The very severe frost of the late spring and 
 the so heavy rains of summer injured this year's crops. The 
 immense crowd and the ceaseless noise have quite overpowered 
 the timid stranger. The cowslip and the crowfoot are over all 
 the hill. The woods and wilds accord with Ids soul's sadnes;^. 
 The children had power. The children of darkness and evil hmi 
 power. You and your friend can seat yom-solves comfortably in 
 that corner. Standing on this spot I can see town and country. 
 Alarmed by the explosion, the women and children rushed out of 
 the house screaming and woepirg. They saw him move stealthily 
 along. The brave deserve the fair. My death and life, my banr- 
 and antidote, are both before me. 
 
 177. Syntax.— -Rule XVI.-— When tlie eubject is 
 miulo up of two or more singular rxouns joined by or 
 or iio?\ tlie verb is singular. 
 
 Only one of the nouns is supposed to be subject. Wlien tlio 
 subjects are pronouns of different persons, the verb agrees with 
 the first person rather than with tiie second, and with the second 
 rather than with the third. 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 83 
 
 ., part of 
 
 an.) 
 
 ., part of 
 
 Exercises*. .,,„, eimikor 
 
 l-l-S Correct tV.o following sentences :- 
 
 lost on the InU . ™f pcter'H the tailor's. How cM y ^^^ ^^^ 
 Brin- my clones tim deceived yon The 8°^^^ ^^^^,^, 
 
 KobertB pencil? ^^^ "^^.^ Mm t» repeat his '^csson. x ^^ 
 
 ■\Vlien tliG 
 fjrocB with 
 ,lie secoucl 
 
 AJNAUii J „„merou3 audience 
 
 1,9.B,._1. An attentYe and mmero^ ^.^ ^ 
 
 coietely filled *« l^v^ 2^^U ^^, , p and a 
 
 -ti^fi S-pautry. 4. Sour>^„ -f.:rai:r 
 ^"':!H-n- not fouAd together. 
 
 „t;ii pnrrv our message 
 
 will carry uu ,, ^^6 s^o. 24i. 
 
 rGeo^georaraUam 
 o 3 
 
8^ 
 
 ENGLISH GBAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Fred. 
 
 1. An attentive and ; filled 
 numerous audience 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 He 
 
 Sarah 
 
 does 
 brought 
 
 4. Sound and sense are found 
 
 5. 
 
 George or 
 Graham 
 
 will carry 
 
 Cum]), of 
 Fred. 
 
 Exten. of Fred. 
 
 the hall 
 
 his \7ork 
 
 a cup and a 
 saucer 
 
 our message 
 
 completely {manner). 
 
 smartly and well 
 
 {manner). 
 
 from the pantry 
 
 {place). 
 
 sometimes {time) not 
 together {manner). 
 
 Analyze Exercises 80, 81, 82, 83, 84i. 
 
 B. CONJUNCTIOKS JOINING SENTENCES. 
 
 180. A verb is called Finite wlien it lias time, 
 number, and person. 
 
 The Indicative and Imperative (and Potential and 
 Subjunctive) are the Finite Moods. 
 
 181. A gentence is called smxAe wliicli contains 
 only one finite verb. 
 
 Eor every faiile verb, tberefore, there must be one 
 smiple sentence. 
 
 Conjunctions join simple sentences togetlier. 
 
 Eacii simple sentence is parsed as if it stood by 
 itself. 
 
 Ex.— (Peter departed) and (James took his place). 
 
 Here there are two finite verhs, departed and took. 
 
 Hence there must bo two simple sentences : — 1st, Peter 
 departed ; 2nd, James took his place. These are joined together 
 by the conjunction and. 
 
 182. Note.— The pupils should point out the finite verb J an(J 
 Bimple sentences yi)'«f, before parsing. 
 
 Exercise 86. 
 
 (The king died) a,nd (the queen succeeded). (Tlio wind blew) 
 and (the waves roared). (The master gave directions) anJ (the 
 fervant obeyed them). (She asked a question) and (she ^ )\ an 
 
 answer). 
 
 (The frien 
 
 The clerk 
 
 coachman 
 
 liim with ( 
 
 nicate wit 
 
 passes aw 
 
 completed 
 
 rectly beg 
 
 The hunt( 
 
 I may mi 
 
 Tell yom 
 
 your was 
 
 known in 
 
 Business 
 
 go to sol: 
 
 tor can \ 
 
 quickly c 
 
 complet( 
 
 The hor 
 
 is good 
 
 gravely 
 
 it. (I^ 
 
 might 1 
 
 the nigl 
 
 the sky 
 
 183 
 
 undei 
 conju 
 
CONJUNCTlONa. 
 
 85 
 
 au.w). (Tho train tnovcA ^^^^IT^r!^^^ 
 (The friendship coiitinuc(l), hut Uio c o ^^^^^ tj^q 
 
 Srhe clerk ^vrote another 1^^^^[' .^^^'/i , Si return. You charge 
 coachman ^vill go to tl^° ;^^f ^ ' ^^ (Your father ^viU comnm- 
 Idm Nvith dishonesty, but he dcmc3 it. {^o ^^^^^ ^,^^ 
 
 nicate with us) Wam*i^e reaches ^^'^ ^^7" ' r^^^ deliberately 
 
 ?ass e's Tway) -^^i^-^frMtt^aB fS have been incor- 
 completed l^is work) although it ^asi ^^^^^^^^ .^st). 
 
 ectlybegun). (We ^f.t^^"\^tXnttUorningligbt appears 
 The hunters have agreed to set out wnen instructions. 
 
 I may make a mistake although you ^^^'^^ gell some of 
 
 Ten your fault honestly, and I ^^J Jj-^^^ i Mend cannot be 
 your waste ground and buy that pi o^^^^^^^^^ ^ .^^^^^^^ ^^ ,,^,erBity 
 known in prosperity, and an «^^«^yj^";;°;eetens rest. (Jane will 
 Business sweetens pleasure ^^ X.; will permit her). (The por- 
 i^ot^ school as soon) as (If ^^^^f/ 'f^jZr. bring it). Bun as 
 tor can bring your ^?f ^SthUele wb to me as soon as he had 
 quickly as you can. He m ght tel raju ^^^^^ ^^, ,^,,ea . 
 
 completed the bargain. /^J^.^l'^^ile butter is scarce, but it 
 The house may remain ^l^^re it is. ii ^^^^^^ person. 
 
 is cood. You may be forgiven p^^t ^^vl ^^ 
 
 understood, m one oi 
 
 conjunction. ^^^,,5,, 87. .^„, 
 
 died), and (wns bmaed). (f^o "■" Y 'i^^t (I would not). (I v-a^ 
 %l\nt (Ml). (I ^vayske1 o go ,^ J disan-omtod at tat , 
 
 asked to eo).b"'/l™''lr'';Tle island onght to 1>0 «f l'^;,^^ 
 Iti^' a.Tea'l SSavly noticed one >-"« JX "o s;:.. 
 tfe to'^bu 'inteJsting .to'^^^S Th^c""^* l^" ^"T ''1 
 to mo till I l.ad «alk«^ "P *" %Sie3t hod been put aside and 
 
 «— /a; s^oJly .-i;y/^\-Sn.o^°S^.iai.. (^, 
 
86 ENOLisn qeammah asb analysis. 
 
 .„clo«nt to bis bureau), (P"V' l^lTcite bc/borrl.^* 
 
 ci s'. .is S-Si^SS'- "- 
 
 'Was a vacant wildness m nis e>es. m 
 to forgive, l^ecause he kno;vB the true vahio of time. 
 The abbot rose and closed his book, 
 
 And donned his sandal shoon, 
 And wandered forth alone to look 
 Upon the summer moon. 
 ThA riftM winds Bi<-h, the breakers roa and shrieks the wild 
 Jeam^J? WlS dos ^hou weep and wail v Dost thou dread the 
 billows' "ra^e or tremble at the gale ? Marvel not tha I am sor- 
 rowful in m'nd. Our ship is B^^ft and strong. My father blessed 
 mrferv "nSy yet did not much complain. Sorely will my mother 
 dgh tm I cime back again. Dost thou dread a French foeman, 
 ni. shiver at the cale? My spouse and boys dwell near thy hall 
 lnrth?bordeiiu- lake. The tombs and the hollow pavement 
 rmf w Ui a son dinrtl-ill of dread ; and the holy chaunt w^s 
 husLrawhilo as, by 'the torches' flame, a gleam of -ns up the 
 sweeping aisle with a mail-clad leader came. Ho s ooped and 
 kissed he frozen check and the hand of lifeless clay, till bursting 
 words gave to his soul's passion way. If she has deceived us, she 
 is very ungrateful. When you are ready, speak. 
 
 When ^the summer harvest was gathered in) ; 
 And (the sheaf of the gleaner grew white and thm) ; 
 And (the ploughshare was in its furrow left). 
 Where (the stubble land had been lately cleft) ; 
 (An Indian hunter, with unstrung bow, , _ , . 
 Looked down) where (the valley lay stretched below). 
 
 It sometimes happens that the unsuspicious herd keep the ground 
 tmtrinclian his emptied his quiver. This is not an evory-day 
 matter, and can only be accomplished when the buiialoes aio m a 
 state of comparative rest. 
 
 Then the hunter turned away from tbat scene, 
 
 Where the home of his fathers once had been ; 
 
 And heard, by the distant and measured stroke, 
 
 That the woodman hewed down the giant oak; 
 
 And burning thoughts flashed over his mind. 
 
 Of the white man's faith and love unkind. 
 
 As I do live by food, I rhet a fool. Here will we sit and let the 
 
 sounds of music creep in our ears. I did no. thmii to siicci a 
 
 tear in all my misery ; but thou hast forced me, out of thy honest 
 
 truth, to play the woman. Speak the speech, as I pronounced it 
 
COMPLEX A^B COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
 
 87 
 
 . r.. Soxmd drums and tmmpotfl 
 
 uear bis v?ar steed Blam., lay a^ ^ ^ ^^ ^i^-^e^ 
 
 And there lay tbo «teed w th Ins nos ^^^^ ^^ ^^.^ ^^.^^^^ 
 
 But through it there ^^^^^'^'"''''^^^^ j,, i, oii.g. I B^all 
 
 , ao not kno. *-^^^^^:;raU ut^^^^^^^^ calls. You ^^ll hear 
 
 the sound, ^'Uen oft at evemn. ^^^^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^,y ^e happy, 
 murmur rose, bivino* "° fa 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XIX 
 
 COMPLEX AND COMPOTJND SENTENCES. _ 
 
 185. EacKof the«.mple «onteBce^_^^ ^j 
 large one is called a Clause^ i ^^j. ^^j^,^i^ the 
 
 t±:ettrranK >-- ^^'^^^^ "^" 
 
 about that subject. principal 
 
 Principal Clause • • /^^g^^ x have more time. 
 
 Suhordimte Clause . • ^ 
 They are joined together hy .Un. 
 1R7 A Complex Sentence contains one pr f 
 
 elaui witl. all tbe rc.t ^f^^:;^^ ^^, ,,,eeahle. 
 _He ^vill leave ^vhen I return, ii^y ^.^^ ^^^^.^ 
 
 Kx.- 
 
 rrincival Chime 
 
 2n(i SuborcJiriafe Clause . 
 
 He will leave 
 
 (when) I return 
 
 (if) you are agreeaWe.. 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 M/. 
 
 
 i<'Me 
 
 i^M 
 
 
 % 
 
 1.0 !?»- «l^ 
 
 •" 132 mil. 
 
 = *^ II 
 
 I.I 
 
 If 1^ 
 
 M 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 
 1.25 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 
 j-4 
 
 6" - 
 
 
 ► 
 
 V2 
 
 ^ 
 
 /a 
 
 ^/. 
 
 '<5. 
 
 ^m 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 VI 
 
 
 /i 
 
 
 > 
 
 •5; 
 
 w 
 
 ^d 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sdences 
 Corporation 
 
 ^: 
 
 ^^ 
 
 V 
 
 d 
 
 i\ 
 
 ,v 
 
 \ 
 
 %^'' 
 
 
 ..m^ 
 
 '^>. 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 
 % 
 
 '1? 
 
 'i?)" 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S80 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 

 
 5> 
 
 1 
 ^ 
 
 r^ 
 
88 ENGIISn GEAMMAB JLNB AlfALTSIS. 
 
 188. A Componnd Sentence contains two or more 
 principal clauses cf equal value. 
 
 Ex -The wind blew fiercely, and the rain poured in torrents. 
 llY^incipalCiame . The wind blew fiercely 
 2nd Principal Clause . (and) the rain poured in torrents. 
 
 H.??ii^ ""^^ *^® principal and subordinate clauses in 
 th^eJoUowmg sentences, according to the examples 
 
 fo"^n"~^ ^^? "^^^ '^^^ ^® ^^^^^ ^^ere tliey ought 
 IXA all? *^"^ ~- '' ^^^ S— [risled 
 
 rr. , - Kind 
 
 Kind of Clause. 
 
 Glauses. 
 
 («) 
 1. The men shall be 
 found 
 
 (6) 
 where they ought to be 
 
 (c) 
 
 when the time comes 
 
 (a) 
 
 2. Our general risked all 
 
 and lost all |Piincipal Clause 
 
 Principal Clause to b, c 
 
 Subordinate Clause to a 
 Subordinate Clause to a 
 Principal Clause 
 
 of Sentence. 
 
 •Complex 
 
 -Compound 
 
 Exercise 88. 
 
 whei^' fi:?/ Them ""yoT' '1 ^'^^ ^■}'^'' ^ ^^^«^ *^^ ^^ooks 
 ^sZ^^SS^^ TcSto^Z 
 
 expect BK a letter If T 1,0 j*i ulS '"""S'lt that you were 
 letter, I wouM toe 4Jtte* mS i,*'/? were expoeling a 
 the flower-bed., he'waTal te^d to^yo"r ^ft^tr u\''l''"1 
 
 ftre ready, 
 etill lives 
 gains. T 
 tJ^ere. It 
 dbthed as: 
 soul will J 
 I will test 
 report mu 
 QaeenstoY 
 when the 
 owners* 
 
 189. "^ 
 in a sem 
 each oth 
 
 190. 1 
 
 nate wit 
 or where 
 
 191. li 
 
 place, ca 
 it is calle 
 wJien you 
 
 Point < 
 
 193. E3 
 
 morn were 
 
 2. The f 
 And t 
 
 ai 
 That 
 
 3. We r 
 
 unless we \ 
 Athenians. 
 

 CO-OEDINATE CLAUSES. 
 
 89 
 
 ftre ready, if our miudsbe so. Clarenco still breathes, — Edward 
 Btill lives and reigns ; when they are gone, then must I count my 
 gains. The beat of the drum and the clash of the battle were 
 tJ^ere. Its brazen studs and tough bull-hide had death bo often 
 d&fthed aside. There is no creature loves me, and if I die, no 
 soul will pity me. Being satisfied with your honesty and ability, 
 I will testify to them when I am called upon to do so. The 
 report must have been true, that the vessel left this port, reached 
 Queenstown in safety, but had not been heard of at New York 
 when the last news left ; for I was told so by the clerk to the 
 owners. We look before and after. And this is in the night 1 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XX. 
 
 189. When there are two or more principal clansea 
 in a sentence, they are said to be Co-ordinate with 
 each other. 
 
 190. Two suhordinate clau!?es may also be co-ordi- 
 nate with each other ; as, I know not jJien he died, 
 or where he lived. 
 
 191. If the subordinate clause tells the time, 
 place, cause, condition, etc., of the principal cLauso, 
 it is called an Adverbial Clause; as, We shall see you 
 when you come. P' ,ce this book where you found it. 
 
 Point out the Adverbial Clauses in Exercises 87, 88. 
 
 193. Ex. — 1. The night is past, and shines the sun as if that 
 morn were a jocand one. 
 2. The forests, with their myriad tongues, shouted of liberty; 
 And the blast of the desert cried aloud, with a voice so wild 
 
 and free, 
 That he started in his sleep and smiled at their tempestuous 
 glee. 
 8. "We may well be assured that notliing good can happen, 
 unless we give due attention to our afairs, and act as becomes 
 Athenians. 
 
90 
 
 ENGLISH GHAMMAE AND AI^'ALTSIS. 
 
 Clausea, 
 
 Compound Sentynce. 
 
 (a) 
 The night is past 
 
 and sliincs the sun 
 
 (c) 
 
 as if that mora were 
 
 a jocund one. 
 
 Compound Sentence, 
 
 (a) 
 
 The forests, with their 
 
 myriad tongues, shouted 
 
 of liberty 
 
 (6) 
 
 And the blast of the 
 
 desert cried aloud, with 
 
 a voice so wild and free 
 
 (c) 
 
 That he started in his 
 
 sleep 
 
 (d) 
 
 and smileo at their 
 
 tempestuous glee. 
 
 3 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 (a) 
 Wo may well be assured 
 
 that nothing good can 
 happen 
 
 Kind of Clause. 
 
 Prin. Cl.,co-ord. 
 with b. 
 
 Prin. 01. tv^ c, 
 co-ord. Avitli a, 
 
 Subord. CI. to ft, 
 {adverbial cl.) 
 
 Pi-in. CI., co-ord. 
 with &. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Thoniglit 
 (and)the sun 
 
 (as if) that 
 morn 
 
 The forests 
 
 Fred. 
 
 Comp, 
 of Prerl. 
 
 Sxten, 
 of Pred.l 
 
 Pi-in.Cl. to c and' (and) the 
 d, oo-ord.with a. blast of the 
 
 desert 
 
 Subord. CI. to b, 
 co-oi'd. with d. 
 (adverbial cl.) 
 
 Subord. Cl. to b, 
 
 co-ord. with c. 
 
 (adv. cl.) 
 
 cried 
 
 (that) he started 
 
 is past 
 shines 
 
 wore a 
 
 jocund 
 
 one. 
 
 shouted 
 
 of 
 
 liberty 
 
 (indir. 
 
 obj.) 
 
 unless we give duo 
 uttention to our affairs, 
 
 (d) 
 and act 
 
 (^> 
 ae Decomcs Athenians 
 
 Prin. Cl to u. 
 Subord. Cl. to a. 
 
 Suboi'd. Cl. to h. 
 (adv. cl.) 
 
 Subord. to b, co- 
 ord, with c. 
 (adv. cl.) 
 
 Su)>ord. to d. 
 (adv, cl.) 
 
 and 
 (he under St. 
 
 We 
 
 (that) no- 
 thing good 
 
 (unless) we 
 
 and (wo 
 underst.) 
 
 as (it 
 underst.) 
 
 smiled 
 
 may be 
 
 iiiisurcd 
 
 can 
 happen 
 
 give 
 
 act 
 becomes 
 
 at their 
 tempes- 
 tuous 
 glee (in- 
 dir. obj.) 
 
 with tlipi: 
 
 myriad 
 
 tongiic!< 
 
 (manner) 
 
 aloud (mm 
 
 wer), Avl*:''5 
 
 voice sow:! 
 
 and free 
 
 (manner, 
 
 in his slee 
 (place) 
 
 due at- 
 tention 
 (du: vhj 
 to our 
 affairs 
 (indir. 
 obj.) 
 
 Athen- 
 ians, 
 
 well 
 (manner) 
 
 Analy 
 above. 
 
 193. g 
 
 conjunci 
 less food 
 eat). S 
 Suppl 
 ing sent 
 
 (I will q 
 profit thar 
 well as I. 
 knew such 
 in nothing 
 war and ; 
 him I reni 
 I render : 
 than he w< 
 Bhould be 
 attain a g 
 attain a gl 
 was steppi 
 from the s 
 this occasi 
 I. Great 
 martial ha 
 policy. Y 
 That eloqi 
 of his cou 
 be happie'i 
 brother. 1» 
 own Lafay 
 of more tt 
 me. You 
 known eor 
 his trial bi 
 There's a 
 sunny laps 
 made tend 
 
ELLIPTICAL S£17TEKC£S. 
 
 91 
 
 np. 
 red. 
 
 Exteiru 
 of rred.i 
 
 ir. 
 ■) 
 
 olr 
 
 PS' 
 IS 
 
 in- 
 
 With thcl 
 
 myriad 
 
 tongues 
 
 (manlier) 
 
 aloud (mm 
 
 ner), Avit'' 
 
 voice 60 wi 
 
 and free 
 
 (manner, 
 
 in his slee 
 (place) 
 
 well 
 (:mamier) 
 
 t- 
 
 1)11 
 
 )hj 
 
 ir 
 
 ■s 
 
 r. 
 
 Analyze Exercises 86, 87, 88, as in the examples 
 above. 
 
 Elliptical Sentences. 
 
 193. Sometimea tlie simple sentences joined by 
 conjunctions are not all quite complete ; as, He eats 
 less food than I ; that is, (He eats less food) than (I 
 eat). Such sentences are called Elliptical Sentences. 
 
 Supply the ellipses where they occur, in the follow- 
 ing sentences Jlrst, and then parse. 
 
 Exercise 89. 
 
 (I will get greater profit) than (you will get). I will get greater 
 profit than you. (You write as well) as (I write). You write as 
 well as I. He suffered more pain than his companion. I never 
 knew such misery as tliia. Human wisdom has been manifested 
 in nothing more conspicuously, than in civil institutions to repress 
 war and retaliation among the citizens of the same state. To 
 him I render more respect than I render mere respect. To him 
 I render more than mere respect. He would rather have you 
 than he would have me. He would rather have you than me. I 
 should be more readily guided by you than him. He expected to 
 attain a glory as bright as the stars are bright. He expected to 
 attain a glory as bright as the stars. He was arrested when he 
 was stepping from the steamer. He was arrested when stepping 
 from the steamer. He has never shown greater abihty than on 
 this occasion. He treated him as a brother. You are taller than 
 I. Great states are compelled to consider the military spirit and 
 martial habits of their people as one of the main objects of their 
 policy. Youth cannot be attributed to any man as a reproach. 
 That eloquence is the ardour of conviction and zeal for the service 
 of his country. You are more generous than he. Can any one 
 be happiei than you ? I am quite as much entitled to it as your 
 brother. No stories are read with more inteicst than those of your 
 own Lafayette. You will act as secretary. Komance has no tales 
 of more thrilling interest than theirs. He loves her as much as 
 me. You praise hers as much as mine. Yes ; that face has 
 known sorrow and suffering. There is now to be brought upon 
 his trial before you, a robber of the public treasury, Caius Verres. 
 There's a beauty for ever unchangingly bright, like the long, 
 sunny lapse of a summer day's light, shining on, by no shadow 
 made tender. 
 
 I 
 
Ii-'l 
 
 92 
 
 ENOLISn OEAMMAR AKD ANALTS18. 
 
 
 m 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XXI. 
 
 194. Analyze Exercise 89 in the following man- 
 ner : — 
 
 Ex.— 1. He endured more hardships than his friend. 2. You 
 speak as well as I. 3. He will more easily find you than me. 
 
 Clauses. 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 ^^> 
 Ho endured more 
 
 hardships 
 than his friend. 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 (a) 
 You epeak as well 
 
 (&) 
 as I. 
 
 8 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 (a) 
 
 He •< \\ more easily 
 
 Jnd you 
 
 (&) 
 than me. 
 
 Kind of Clause. 
 
 Prin. CI. to 6. 
 
 Subord. CI. to a. 
 (adv. cl.) 
 
 Prin. Cl. to &. 
 
 Subord. Cl. to a. 
 {adv. cl.) 
 
 Subject, 
 
 Prin. Cl. to &. 
 
 Subord. Cl. to a. 
 {adv. cl.) 
 
 He 
 
 (than) his 
 friend 
 
 You 
 (as) I 
 
 Pred I ^'^^ 
 
 He 
 
 (than) he 
 (underst.) 
 
 endured 
 
 endured 
 {undst.) 
 
 speak 
 
 speak 
 
 {undst.) 
 
 more 
 hard- 
 ships 
 
 Exten, 
 of Fred 
 
 196. G 
 
 on wliicl 
 you coul 
 
 The pe( 
 person, wii 
 
 The Si] 
 
 will flntl 
 
 will find 
 (undst.) 
 
 you 
 mo. 
 
 as well 
 (manner) 
 
 Sing. 1. ( 
 2. I 
 
 Flu. 
 
 3. ( 
 
 1. ( 
 
 2. ( 
 
 3. ( 
 
 more easi 
 (manner 
 
 195. A group of words, making sense, but contain- 
 ing no finite verb, is called a Phrase. 
 
 Ex.— The trees of the forest are bare in winter. Of the forest 
 and in winter are phrases. They sang very sweetly indeed. 
 Very sweetly indeed is an adverbial phrase. 
 
 Point out the Phrases in Exercises 87, 88, 89. 
 
 Sing. 1. (J 
 
 2. (. 
 
 3. (J 
 
 Plu. 1. [1 
 
 2. {1 
 
 3. {1 
 
 For those 
 of the Subji 
 so with the 
 
 197. So 
 the Bubju: 
 go. Othe 
 mood ; as 
 subjunctiv 
 
SFBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 98 
 
 SUJiJIJNOTIVE MOOD. 
 
 196. The Subjunctive Mood expresses the condition 
 on which something will be done. If I were enqaaed 
 you could go. ^ J i 
 
 The peculiarity of this mood is that it has no inflection for 
 person, with one exception. 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood of verb To Be. (See 150.) 
 
 Present Tense, j>ast Tense. 
 
 Sing. 1. (If) I be Sinff. 1. (//) I were 
 
 2. (If) thou wert or you 
 were 
 
 3. (If) he were 
 
 Plu. 1. (If) we be Piu. 1. (//) we were 
 
 -^^ W) ye or you be " — 
 
 3. (If) they be 
 etc. 
 
 2. (If) thou be or you be 
 
 3. (If) he be 
 
 2« (-f/) ye or you were 
 8. (X/* ) they were 
 etc. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Sing. 1. (If) I love 
 
 2. (//■ ) thou love or you 
 
 love 
 
 3. (If) he love 
 
 P^M. 1. (If) we love 
 
 2. (7/) ye or you love 
 
 3. (If) they love 
 
 Verb 5b Zove (See 140.) 
 Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 Past Tense. 
 Sing. 1. (J/) I loved 
 
 2. (I/) thou loved or you 
 
 loved 
 
 3. (If) he loved 
 
 PZu. 1. (//) we loved 
 
 2. (7/) ye or you loved 
 
 3. (//) they loved 
 
 For those who use the compound tenses, the remaining tenses 
 ot the Subjunctive correspond with those of the Indicative, and 
 BO with the Pa°.sive Voice. 
 
 197. Sometimes the conjunction is omitted before 
 the subjunctive mood ; as, Were I engaged, you could 
 go. Other conjunctions besides if are used with tliia 
 mood; as, unless, though, although, lest, etc. The 
 subjunctive is alwajs used in a subordinate sentence. 
 
M 
 
 EiraLISH GBAMMAB A.ND ANALTSia. 
 
 If 
 I 
 
 were 
 
 yon, 
 
 etc. 
 
 Ex. — If I weru you, I would go, 
 a conj., joining two sentences. (Rule XIII.) 
 a sim. pers. pron., 1st pers., sing., eith., nom. or subj. to 
 
 loere, (Rule I.) 
 a sub. or intians. verb, 1st pers., sing., past, subinnc, aer. 
 
 with L (Rule II.) ^ 
 
 a sim. pers. pron., 2nd pers., sing., eith., nom. or subj. 
 
 after loere. (Rule X.) 
 
 Exercise 90. 
 
 It will be sad if it happen. If I were engaged, you could go. 
 
 If thou consider rightly of the matter, Csesar had great wrong. I 
 
 wiil get up early, if you will call. The merchant will fail, although 
 
 his friends do help him. Love not sleep, lest thou come to poverty. 
 
 Unless he improve, he cannot be allowed to remain. If it were 
 
 done, when 'tia done ; then 'twere well it were done qiuckly. Were 
 
 you to be aaked that question, how would you reply ? Though 
 
 he write, I cannot promise to do a-nything. Unless we work, we 
 
 must starve. He must leave his native land lest he die. If he 
 
 were there, I should be satisfied. They fasten it with nails and 
 
 hammers that it move not. If he repent, forgive him. Though 
 
 he were dead, yet shall he live. If this be the law, you are guilty. 
 
 Were you the Idng, I would not bend. Were I certain that your 
 
 story was reliable, I would leave to-morrow. Were he to state his 
 
 reasons, I could not be more able to judge. 
 
 Analyze Exercise 90. 
 
 THE EELATIYE rRONOUN. 
 
 198. The Relative Pronoun introduces a subordi- 
 nate clause, and partakes of the nature of a con- 
 junction. It always refers to some word or phrase 
 going before, called its Co-relative* or Antecedent. 
 
 199. The Simple Eelative Pronouns are who, which, 
 and that, used as nominatives or subjects. 
 
 PFho is used when the co-relative is a person or 
 personified noun. 
 
 Which is used when the co-relative is not a person. 
 
 (That may be used whatever be the co-relative. 
 * Also spelt Correlative ; but the word is easily made plain to 
 pupils by usmg, as aa illustration, tho name of a firm, as, Smith 
 & Co., Relative & Co. 
 
 <iaw 
 
 the 
 man 
 
 who 
 
 tipoke 
 
 (They : 
 
 the patier 
 
 who was t^ 
 
 the very 
 
 rTicers pu 
 
 larmer boi 
 
 the only h 
 
 duke wcnl 
 
 vessel was 
 
 the lady wi 
 
 Queen's H 
 
 book to hit 
 
 used to sp( 
 
 confi;"med 
 
 person tha 
 
 return the 
 
 her. The 
 
 The postm 
 
 wood. Sei 
 
 of the appl 
 
 and dog thf 
 
 and slate, t 
 
 chain whicl 
 
THE RELATIVE PEONOITN. 
 
 95 
 
 200. Syntax.-RuleXVII.-TheEolatiyo Pronoun 
 has the same person, number, and gender as its Co- 
 relative. 
 
 He 
 
 Maw 
 
 the 
 man 
 who 
 
 spoke 
 
 THE CO-RELATIVE AS OBJECT. 
 
 Ex. — He saw the man who si)oke. 
 
 a Sim. pers. pron. 3rd pers., sing., masc, nora. or subj. 
 to saio. (Rule I.) '' 
 
 ' SrAr^R^'ioi^Lr- '""■• ''"'• ^^- ^^'■^''^'- 
 
 a dist. adj., pointing out man. (Rule IV.) 
 
 a noun, 3rd pers., sing., masc, obj. hjsatv. (Rule III.) 
 
 a Sim. rel. pron., 3rd pera., sing, (why?), masc. (lohi/?), 
 
 nom or subj. to spoke (Rule I.), agr. with its co^ 
 
 relative man. (Rule XVII.) 
 an intrans. verb 3rd pers., smg., past, ind. (act.), agr. 
 
 mihivho. (Rule II.) « *- ' \ j> b 
 
 Exercise 91. 
 
 (They love the motlier) (who tended them). (The doctor saw 
 the patient) (who was dying). The engine Idlled the workman 
 Who was the only support of a large family. The carriage brought 
 the very stranger who accompanied us on our voyage. The 
 oflhcers pursued the Hon which had destroyed the cattle. TJie 
 armer bought the only horse which was left. The farmer boucht 
 the only horse that was left. The duke went to the queen. The 
 duke went to the queen who was staying in the palace. The 
 vessel was commanded by a captain who had often sailed. Go to 
 the lady who visits your family. The assembly was held in the 
 J^ueen s Hotel, which was prepared for the occasion. Give the 
 book to him who will pay for it. Sorrow has saddened him who 
 used to speak so cheerily. A courier arrived with a let^jr that 
 confirmed the king's worst fears. It must hfive been a malicious 
 person that did it. The captain ^truck the mate, who did not 
 return the blow. This money is all the fortune which was left to 
 lier. The busmess will not pay the dividend that was expected, 
 ihe postman was attacked by some men who issued from the 
 wood. Send the books that were ordered. You must buy some 
 of tiie apples which have just come in. He passed the shepherd 
 and dog that have never since been seen. Our boy bought a book 
 and slate, which are both lost. My tyrant foes have forged th« 
 chain which binds me in this dismal cell. 
 
96 
 
 ENQLTsn geammah and analysis. 
 
 
 "4: 
 
 
 I ,;. 
 
 THE CO-RELATIVE AS SUBJECT OR NOMINATIVE. 
 
 201. In the last exercise the Co-relative was always 
 in the objective. When the Co-relative is in the 
 nominative, the clause wifch the Relative is generally 
 in the midst of the other clause. 
 
 Exercise 93, 
 
 The boy departed. The boy (who spoke) departed. A soldier 
 (who had returned) has died. Our parents (who love us) deserve 
 all our regard. The magistrate (who sits on the bench) is not 
 very young. God, who governs the world, is just and good. The 
 cavalry (that have been pureuing the Turks on the right hand) 
 are coming up. The child (that had done so many kind things 
 for him) was never out of his remembrance. The first nerson 
 (that moves) shall be shot. You are the person who ought to 
 have attended to that matter. Peter is the man who is to go. 
 Men who are engaged in commercial pursuits are generally shrewd. 
 He who is boldest should march first. If I were in your place, I 
 would dismiss the servant who is so disagreeable. It was you 
 who sought the interview, and who are responsible for the results. 
 I was asking the man who keeps the door, if he knew such a per- 
 son, but he has never heard the name. I, who am only a work 
 woman, could not face so many dangers. Thou, who rulest in 
 heaven, look down on our miseries, and remove them. They who 
 love vice will suffer by it sooner or later. Gloucester stumbled 
 and struck me, who sought to stay him, overboard into the tum- 
 bling billows of the main. Shall I get your order from the mer- 
 chant who took it ? Unless wo can trace the per^^on who left the 
 letter, I fear we will not find a better clue than the one whic^ has 
 been given us ah-eady. Lend him an umbrella. 
 
 Complex Scni 
 
 ANALYTICAL LES8G_" XXII. 
 
 202. Ex. — I bring the boy who wants a situation. 
 What boy is brought ? The boy who wants a situation. 
 
 The clause Who wants a situation tells us about 
 the boy, and gives a quality by which to distinguish 
 him from otlier boys, and is consequently a clause 
 used as an adjective^ or an Adjective^ Clause. 
 
THE BELATIVE PHONOUN. 
 
 97 
 
 \TIVE. 
 
 i alwaya 
 
 in the 
 
 enerally 
 
 A soldier 
 3) deserve 
 ill) is not 
 ood. The 
 :ht Ijand) 
 id tliinga 
 st person 
 ought to 
 is to go. 
 r shrewd, 
 r place, I 
 was you 
 e results, 
 ch a per* 
 y a wcpk 
 rulest in 
 i'hey who 
 stumbled 
 the tum- 
 tho mer- 
 3 left the 
 hie]' has 
 
 203. The Eelative Pronoun introduces an Adjective 
 
 Claus 
 
 box 
 
 which was promised, 
 gentleman who came here and dined is gone. 
 
 2. The 
 
 Clmises. 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 (a) 
 I will Bcnd the box 
 
 (6) 
 
 thlch was promised 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 (a) 
 
 The geuLieraau is 
 gone 
 
 (b) 
 who came here 
 
 (0 
 
 and dined 
 
 Rind of Clattse. 
 
 Prin. 01. to b. 
 
 Subord.CI. to a 
 {aOJ, cl.) 
 
 Prin. Cl. to & 
 
 and c. 
 
 Subord. Cl. to a, 
 
 co-ord. with c 
 
 {adj. cl.) 
 
 Subord. CI. to a, 
 
 co-ord. with b 
 
 (adj. cl.) 
 
 Suhjedt. 
 
 I 
 
 which 
 
 The 
 gontlcm 
 
 who 
 
 (pnJ) who 
 (iindst.) 
 
 Pred, 
 
 will 
 send 
 
 « 
 
 was pro- 
 mibcd. 
 
 is gone 
 
 Comp. ! Extm, 
 of Fred of Pred, 
 
 the box 
 
 I 
 
 here {plan) 
 
 Analyze Exercises 91 and 92. 
 
 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN AS OBJECT. 
 
 204. Nom. (or suhj.) Who 
 Ohj. Whom 
 
 which 
 which 
 
 that 
 that 
 
 205. Syntax.— Rule XVIII.— The Eelative Pronoun 
 as Object comes before the verb which governs it j 
 as, — 
 
 The clerk whom you saw is dead ; that is, you saw whom. 
 
 Whom I a sim. rel. pron., 3rd pers., sing., ^asc, obj. by saw* 
 (Rule III. and Rule XVIII.) 
 
 I 
 
98 
 
 IWOLISH CHAMMAB AND ANALTSTS. 
 
 11 '.r 
 
 Excrciso 93. 
 
 His eldest brother introflucccl the gentlemftn whom yon sair 
 fycu saw whom). A first-rate situation was obtnined by the book- 
 keeper whom you.- uncle had dismissed (your uncle had dismissed 
 whom). Wo called to osk for the child whom the carriage injured 
 You know the author whom the children most admire. I will cet 
 the song which he likes best. The landlord could not sell the 
 house which the owner of the hall wished to puroliaso. You can 
 buy the number that you want (you want that). It is the worst 
 case that I have ever decided. You have repeated the blunder 
 that I pointed out to you yesterday. Yon old chateau (which you 
 were admiring) has not been occupied for thirty-four years. The 
 apples which Ibought) are not ripe. The parties, whom we ac 
 cidentally met m Germany, send tneir compliments to us. He 
 whom you trusted has cadly deceived you. Go to the men whom 
 you have injure \ and beg their forgiveness, and I will receive you. 
 xn ..IS way Mr, Jormyn inwardly appealed against an unjust con- 
 t'ltl"^ :^hi«'i If old acquaintance might put on certain items 
 Z ILY?'^' ^^'' f ^f"^'^ irritation, dread, and defiance which 
 he was feehng towards him in ths middle of the day. depended on 
 
 Prepos 
 
 206. The Relative is somstimes ffoverned by a 
 '''^^osition. •'^ 
 
 Exercise 94. 
 
 «ffLTi"i f "^ ,*^^%«c^ant to whom you are attached {vou are 
 ftttachcd to whom). Bring the friend of whom you spoke I 
 
 true and good workman for whom I asked your sympathy. He 
 beside whom I stand, is the inspector of mines. Let us Worship 
 the Lord in whom we live, and move, and have our bein,^. The 
 
 T^y^ 'll^il f'^ ^T''^ concealed himself is still to be seen. 
 Tne sheriff before whom they were to appear is the most expe- 
 had been erected to commemorate the abolition of an unjust law. 
 The bridge beneath which we arc passing is used for railway puT: 
 po.es. M ^ey that dwell under his shadow shall return ^ The 
 waste ot wild sea-moor on which they now dwelt, offered only a 
 few patches of soil fit for cultivation. The onlv supplies which 
 nature furnished were the fish which swarmed ii the waterT^d 
 the salt which encrusted the beds of the lagoons. 
 
 See No. 2U. 
 
THE BELATITE PPOKOFN. 
 
 r 
 
 whose j (none) 
 which that 
 
 THE RELATIVE PxlONOUK AS POSSESSOR. 
 
 207. JSfom, (or 4uhj.) Who which | that 
 1*088. Whose 
 Olj, Whom 
 
 Exercise 93. 
 
 Our friend prefers the house whose chimneys you see yonder 
 (you see whose chimneys yondej). That carriage belongs to thfl 
 parents whose children piny vith us. I venerate the man whose 
 heart is warm "^-hose hands are pure. An extensive farmer, wliose 
 fields you see around, has lost many cattle by the plague which 
 is BO pre mlent. A very largo oak, whose trunk had withstood 
 many a f overe gale, was n)iatterr'l by a flash of h'ghtning dui-i.ng 
 the terridc thanderstorm that lately visited this district. Do you 
 know the name of t' t large river which flows across South 
 America into the Atlantic Ocean, and whose waters can be traced 
 far out to sea? The mountain, from whose siderj the br-^"..: lows, 
 is only twelve hundred feet in height. The candidate ; i >/i ose 
 behalf I labour, will be certain to be highest at the poll. 
 
 208. As is sometimes used as a Eelative Pronoun, 
 and wMcli as an Adjective. 
 
 209. Sometimes tlie Eelative Pronoun is not ex- 
 pressed, but understood ; as, 
 
 I have the book you sent ; that is, I have the bool<; tchich you 
 sent. 
 
 210. Sometimes the Co-relativo is understood; as, 
 Who stirs, shall fall ; that is. He who stirs, shall fall. 
 
 211. Sometimes the Co-relative is a whole sentence ; 
 
 as, — 
 
 He has not returned, "vhich is a source of some alarm. 
 
 Supply the ellipses, where they occur, in the follow- 
 ing sentences, and parse : — 
 
 Exercise 96. 
 
 The letter your father lost cannot be found. Give it to the cni? 
 you love best. Tell me the tales I delighted to hear long ago. I 
 
 II 2 
 
 ii 
 
100 
 
 ENGLISH GBAMMAB AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 
 hold to you the hands you first beheld. Send the recipe of which 
 you spoke. Send the recipe that you spoke of. Send the recipe 
 you spoke of. That is the king we love so well. He must place 
 me in a hall which is fit for monarchs to dwell in. He must 
 place me in a hall fit for mouarchs to dwell in. Byron is the 
 author of the lines he repeated. I forget the words he used. 
 Are you acquainted with the writings he lectured about? The 
 watch he had belonged to his father. The sword thou hast was 
 worn on many a bloody field. Who steals my purse, steals trash. 
 That banker took with him no money, which shows he had no 
 intention of leaving the country, as was reported. We are such 
 stuff as dreams are made on. A man should never be ashamed 
 to own that he has been in the wrong, which is but saying in 
 other words that he is wiser to-day than he was yesterday. The 
 king, who was compelled to dismiss his mmisters, determined to 
 call to his councils fresh men. The king, compelled to dismiss 
 his ministers, determined to call to his councils fresh men. There 
 has been, which may easily be shown, great deception practised. 
 Who does not work, must starve. I did not learn which book was 
 lost. For which reason he will do it. 1 do not care who knows 
 it. The wisest man that ever lived is liable to err. They de- 
 clared him innocent, which he could not be. The gentleman you 
 have just seen is the celebrated poet of whom so much has been 
 said. Those who seek Wisdom will find her. There was there- 
 fore, which is all that we assart, a course of life pursued by them 
 different from that which they before led: Who lives to virtue 
 rarely can be poor. The feat was performed by one of the men, 
 but by which (man) I cannot say. I may do that I phall be sorry 
 for. He that committeth sin transgresseth also the law, for sin 
 is the transgression of the law. ITe spoke as follows. The namea 
 sre aa follow. 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XXIIL 
 
 212. Ex. — 1. The lord of the manor brought the 
 friends vrhom we met to spend Christmas with him. 
 2. Give the letter to the baker, from whom T shall 
 receive it as I pass. 3. We have a religion whose 
 origin is divine. 4. The staff your grandfather used 
 cannot be found anywhere. 
 
TllE liELATIVE PltOJJfOUN. 
 
 101 
 
 Clauses, 
 
 Vomplex Scntcvcc. 
 
 (a) 
 
 The lord of the 
 manor brought the 
 
 friends to spend 
 Christmas with liiui 
 
 (6) , 
 whom wc mot 
 
 2 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 (a) 
 
 Givctho letter to the 
 
 baker 
 
 (h) 
 
 from whom I shall 
 
 receive it 
 
 (c) 
 
 as I pass 
 
 8 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 (a) 
 Wc have a religion 
 
 (ft) 
 
 whcsc origin is 
 
 divine 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 The staff cannot be 
 found anywhere 
 
 (h) 
 
 your grandfather 
 
 used 
 
 Kind of Clause. 
 
 Suhjcct. 
 
 Fred. 
 
 Comp. 
 of Fred. 
 
 Exten. 
 ofPnd. 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 to spend 
 
 Prin. CI. to b. 
 
 Tlio lord of 
 
 l)rought 
 
 the 
 
 Christmas 
 
 the manor 
 
 
 friends 
 
 with him 
 
 
 
 
 
 (cause) 
 
 Subord. CI. to a. 
 
 "we 
 
 met 
 
 whom 
 
 
 (adj. cl.) 
 
 
 
 the let- 
 ter :di.r 
 
 lb.) 
 
 
 Trin. Cl. to b. 
 
 you 
 
 {under St.) 
 
 give 
 
 to tlio 
 
 baker 
 
 (indir. 
 
 obj.) 
 
 
 rfubord. Cl. to a. 
 
 I 
 
 shall 
 
 it 
 
 from whom 
 
 (adj. cl.) 
 
 receive 
 
 AW 
 
 (place) 
 
 Subord. Cl. to b. 
 
 (as) I 
 
 pass 
 
 
 
 {adv. cl.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 Prin. Cl. to 6. 
 
 Wo 
 
 have 
 
 a 
 
 religion 
 
 
 Subord. Cl. to a. 
 
 whose 
 
 is divine 
 
 
 
 (adj. cl.) 
 
 origin 
 
 
 
 not 
 
 ' Prin. Cl. to b. 
 
 The staff 
 
 can be 
 found 
 
 
 (ynniaiet) 
 
 anywhera 
 
 (place) 
 
 Subord. Cl. to a. 
 
 your 
 
 used 
 
 which 
 
 
 (adj. cl.) 
 
 grandfather 
 
 
 (nndst.) 
 
 
 Analyze Exercises 93, 94', 95, and 96. 
 
102 
 
 ENGLISH 6^EAMMAB AlO) AJXJlLYSIQ. 
 
 U fe 
 
 i 
 
 v/1 
 
 ■ I 
 
 I 
 
 THE COMPOUND EELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 213. What is called a Compound Relative Pronotm, 
 
 as it IS supposed to include the relative and co-rela- 
 tive ; as, 
 
 I hear what you say; that is, I hear the thing which you say. 
 
 214. What is sometimes an adjective ; as, 
 I know not by what means we shall obtain it. 
 
 215 W7iat, as a compound relative, will include, 
 sometimes both a nominative and an objective ; some- 
 times two nominatives; and sometimes two obiec- 
 tives ; as, '' 
 
 1. I heard i(;7ia« was said. 2. ^;»ae was said, was true. 3.1 
 neard what you said. 
 
 io^wIPsafr^ ^^ ^^^^^^ objective by heard, and partly nominative 
 
 lu (2) it is partly nominative to was said, and partly aomina- 
 tive to loas true. "^ *"*"» 
 
 said ^^^ ^* ^^ ^^^*^^ objective by heard, and partly objective by 
 
 216. Whoever, whichever, whatever, whosoever, ivUch- 
 soever, whatsoever, and whoso are Compound Eelativo 
 Pronouns. 
 
 Ex.— I will tell what I mean. 
 
 What I a comp. rel. pron., partly obj. by tell (Rule III.), and 
 
 I partly obj. by wean. (Rule III.) ' 
 
 Exercise 97. 
 
 ^ He says what he thinks. I repeat what I heard. Write what 
 IS new. Sell what you can. This book is what is wanted. What 
 you may say will not affect the question. We are very anxious to 
 know what has happened. I will state what I was ir^u i,„t I 
 cannot vouch for its truth, as my autliority is questionable. ' You 
 may do what you please, but nothing will avail. Whoever goei 
 
TUE SUBJECT AifD THE OBJECT. 
 
 103 
 
 in will not be allowed to return by tliis gate. Whoever will pro- 
 ceed to the spot will find an immense cave extending into the 
 earth. Think on whatever is honest. I speak not to disproT© 
 what Brutus spoke. When ho saw what had been done, he lifted 
 up his voice and wept. We speak what we do know, and testify 
 what we have seen. In what light soever we view him, he will 
 bear inspection. What (adv.) with fatigue, and what with hunger, 
 they were in a most miserable condition. I will tell you what 
 lettera to write. Whoso sheddeth man's blood, by man ehall 
 have his blood shed. 
 
 The Sul}ject and the Object. 
 
 217. Sometimes the Subject of the verb is a simple 
 Sentence or a Phrase. Sometimes the Object of the 
 verb is a simple Sentence or a Phrase ; as, 
 
 (He is guilty) was the cry. He said (I am dying). 
 
 Exercise 98. 
 
 The Bible teachus " God is love." He asked. Where is jour 
 brother ? He shrieked out aloud, '* Clarence is come, false, fleet- 
 ing, perjured Clarence, that stabbed me in the field by Tewkes- 
 bury." (That you have wronged me) doth appear in this. (Read- 
 ing good books) improves the mind. To suffer is the destiny 
 of man. To obey our parents is our duty. Hunting the tiger 
 is a favourite sport in India. To knit together the broken bonds 
 of friendship will be no easy task. That you said all this, I can 
 prove. They took it away from (before his face). Come out from 
 (under the table). Caesar cried, " Help me, or I sink." Did you 
 say I omitted a part of my lecture ? To do to others as you would 
 wish that they should do to you, is the golden rule. The poverty 
 of many is the wealth of some. '• No more, there is no more," 
 he said, «' to lift the sword for now." She answered, " Seven are 
 we, and two of us at Conway dwell, and two are gone to sea." 
 Quoth he, " Put out the boat and row me to the Inchcape rock, 
 and I'll plague the priest of Abcrbrothock." When he will 
 returu is uncertain. (Four times five) is twenty. Four times 
 five are twenty. (Three and six) is nine. Three and six are 
 nine. " I will try " has wrought wonders. 
 
 218. Sometimes the Object of a preposition consisth 
 of a Phrase or a simple Sentence ; as, 
 
 He will leave before Friday. He will leave before {you come). 
 
 Note. — Prepositions governing simple sentencei are by 9om« 
 called Conjunctions. (See Ex. 87.) 
 
i.'»Sf 
 
 fc'i 
 
 m 
 
 N'^^i*> 
 
 104 
 
 ENOLISn GltAMMAH AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 Exercise 99. 
 
 You Fill not return before Thursday. You will not return 
 before (the work is finished). The meeting is postponed till 
 evening. The meeting is postponed till (the chairman has 
 returned). He gamed his end by perseverance. He gained his 
 end by (persevering in the work). From a butcher's boy he rose 
 to be chancellor. From (being a butcher's boy) he rose to be 
 chancellor. In (laying down the law) be sure that you give justice. 
 1-et us conclude the public worship of God by (singing the Sixty- 
 third Hyran). Eemember to lock all the doors before the mana^^er 
 goes home. Never blame a friend till you are satisfied that he 
 has done what has been laid to his charge. Before I would endure 
 such obloquy, I would ^eave the country. Tarry till I come. The 
 letter came after nine o'clock. The letter came after everybody 
 hod left the ofiTice. After 1 have once explained it, do not forget 
 It. Ihrough being intemperate, he lost his situation. To (living 
 soberly and righteously) add living godly. If there be any here, 
 let them come forward. 
 
 INTEEROaATIVE PEONOUNS. 
 
 219. Who, which, and what, when used in asking 
 questions, are called Interrogative Pronouns ; as, 
 
 • Jf'^^a^eyou? fF/iom seek ye? TTAa* are you doing ? Which 
 IS the book ? .» & " ^^v/i 
 
 Who 
 Whom 
 
 an interrogative pronoun, 3rd pers., eing., masc, nom. 
 after are. (Rule X.) 
 
 ^""(Eule nf)"'''' ^'"^ ^^'^" ^'"^'' ®'*^" ''^^' ^^ '^'^' 
 
 Exercise 100. 
 
 Who has the pencil-case ? I (have) . What will he do ? Which 
 of the kings died on his bed ? Robert (died ). Who can measure 
 aie waters of the ocean ? What shalfl say ? Wha waTdone ? 
 Nothing (was done). Which may be made most readily ? TWs 
 V\ hat should be done to the person who owns this ? Who will 
 introduce me f^ the gentleman who manages the bank here ? I. 
 io which oi the partners should I apply ? (To) him. From 
 wliom^comes such a letter ? (Such a letter comes from whomS 
 ^x.oru; uiQ xo wuom shaU we give thanks for the service which 
 has been done to us ? Peter. Whose house should be visited 
 
 first? 
 made ? ] 
 was won 
 tained th( 
 that even^ 
 Who did : 
 Yes, I did 
 He cares 
 creeps. "' 
 have ? T 
 
 Were dea 
 angel, the 
 should as! 
 
 Whatsoev 
 There are 
 before he 
 this, 'tis G 
 cise, whic] 
 the son o 
 
 There is a 
 is it? 
 
 220. "^ 
 
 Object ii 
 
 Ex.— 1. 
 is staying 
 He does n 
 S. Who si 
 
 * Each 
 

 NOUN CLAUSE. 105 
 
 first ? Ours, 
 made ? His. 
 ■was won has 
 
 In whose name has this announcement been 
 The anniversary of the day on which the battle 
 again returned, and we, whose fathers nobly main- 
 
 tained the honour of the English name, are met to commemorate 
 that event which spread so great a halo round our country's arms. 
 Who did it ? I. Who will go ? I. Did you bring the message ? 
 Yes, I did. Who can carry this ? I. Whose is this ? Mine. 
 He cares not what he says or does. Then came forth whatever 
 creeps. What say you ? Who goes there ? Which will |you 
 have ? They asked him a question. When do you return ? 
 
 I dare do all that may become a man ; 
 Who dares do more is none. 
 
 Were death denied, even fools would wish to die. Were he an 
 angel, they would not believe. They love each other.* We 
 should assist one another.* I will go wherever you desire. 
 
 There's a tide in the affairs of men. 
 
 Which, taken at the flood, leads on to fortune. 
 
 Whatsoever thy hand findeth to do, do it with all thy might. 
 There are those who express a different opinion. Keats, a little 
 before he died, said, " I feel th.e daisies growing over me." In 
 this, 'tis God directs; in that, 'til man. Homer is remarkably con- 
 cise, which renders him lively aiid agreeable. Who is this David, 
 the son of Jesse? 
 
 I hear a voice you ci"^.r>oi; hear, 
 Which says I must not stay ; 
 
 I see a hand you cannot see, 
 Which beckons me away. 
 
 There is a reaper whose name is Death. Who 's there ? Which 
 
 is it? 
 
 Tell us, for doubtless thou canst recollect. 
 
 To whom should we assign the Sphinx's fame ? 
 
 ANALYTICAL LESSON XXIV. 
 
 220. "When a simple Sentence is used as Subject or 
 Object in placo of a noun, it is called a Noun Clause. 
 
 Ex. — 1. Hear him repeat what he has learned. 2. Where ho 
 is staying is not known. 3. To refrain fror. evil is a duty. 4. 
 He does not intend to leave before he puts his affairs in order. 
 6. Who shall be sent to Paris ? 
 
 * Each other and one another are called Reciprocal Pronouns, 
 
100 
 
 ENaHSH GUAMMAE AND Ai^ALXSIS. 
 
 Clauses, 
 
 i.'l 'i 
 
 
 CtompZeos /Sentence. 
 Hear hiiu repeat 
 
 what ho has learned 
 
 Complex Sentence. 
 
 Where he is staying 
 
 , (&) 
 Is not known 
 
 3 
 
 Simple Sentence. 
 
 To refrain from evil 
 is a duty 
 
 Comple^-c Sentence. 
 
 (a) 
 
 He does not intend 
 
 to leave 
 
 (&) 
 before he puts his 
 afiaii's in order 
 
 Kind of Clause. 
 
 Prin. CI. to 6. 
 
 Subord. CI. to a. 
 inouncl.aaohj.) 
 
 Subord. CI. to 6 
 
 (noun cl. as 
 
 subj.) 
 
 Prin. Cl. to a. 
 
 Suhjcct. 
 
 Simple Sentence. 
 
 Simple Sentence. 
 
 Who shall be sent to 
 Paris ? 
 
 Prin. Cl. to &. 
 
 Subord. Cl. to a. 
 (ady. ci!.) 
 
 Simple Sentence. 
 
 Fred. 
 
 You(undst.) 
 
 he 
 
 he 
 
 noun clause 
 (a) 
 
 To refrain 
 from evil 
 (in/, phr.) 
 
 He 
 
 (before) he 
 
 hear 
 
 has 
 
 learned 
 
 Is 
 staying 
 
 is 
 known 
 
 Camp, 
 of Fred. 
 
 is a duty 
 
 him 
 
 (direct 
 
 o6j.) (to) 
 
 repeat 
 
 (indir. 
 
 ohj.) 
 
 what 
 
 Of Pr* 
 
 Wlio 
 
 docs 
 intend 
 
 puts 
 
 iliall be 
 sent 
 
 to leave 
 
 (indir. 
 
 obj.) 
 
 his 
 affairs 
 
 Analyze Exercises 97, 98, 90, 100. 
 
 wheii 
 {plac% 
 
 not! 
 (fnaml 
 
 nol 
 (mam 
 
 inor( 
 (mani 
 
 to Pa 
 
 (pM 
 
INTEEJECTIONS. 
 
 INTEEJECTIOJSrS. 
 
 221. An Interjection is used to express some hv 
 den feeling or emotion ; as, Alas ! he was killed, 
 has no grammatical connection with the sentence. 
 
 Exercise 101. 
 
 Alas 1 you do not know the misery of their position. Oh ! \ 
 orator's voice is a mighty power. Hurrah ! the foe is comi] 
 Oh 1 come ye in peace here, or come ye in war ? Ha i wl 
 means this warlike guise ? Hurrah ! the work is done. HoUc 
 who goes there ? I would willingly assist you, but, alas 1 I cs 
 not. Hark ! the lark at heaven's gate sings. Lo ! I will sta 
 at thy right hand, and keep the bridge with thee. Tush 1 mi 
 your own business. Hush 1 'tis the dicebox. 
 
 Oh 1 but to breathe the breath of the cowslip and primrose swe( 
 With the sky above my head, and the grass beneath my feet. 
 Heigh-ho I 'tis weary, weary work. Lead on, farewell! 
 that this too, too solid flesh would melt, thaw, and resolve its 
 into a dew I Oh iie I 'tis an unweeded garden that grows to set 
 La 1 how you frighten me. Pshaw 1 who told you that story ? 
 
 Adieu I adieu 1 My native shore 
 Fades o'er the waters blue. 
 
 Nouns of the First and Second Persons. 
 222. Nouns are sometimes of the First and Secor 
 Persons as well as of the Third. All nouns addresse 
 are Second person, and are in the Nominative cas 
 called the Nominative of Address. 
 
 Exercise 102. 
 
 I, James Miller, declare that this is the very paper. I, Dav: 
 Stewart, certify that he bears a good character. I, John Burn 
 am responsible. You, Martha Davidson, are quite correct. Yo; 
 sir, must be the man. Jessie Craig, bring the book. Oh ! nigh 
 and storm, and darkness, ye are wondrous strong. Eoll on, the 
 deep and dark blue ocean, roll ! Plato, thou reasonest wa 
 Oh ! coward conscience, how dost thou afflict me 1 Were 
 nearer, I would pluck it down. 
 
 Ho ! maidens of Vienna ! Ho I matrons of Lucerne ! 
 
 Weep, weep and rend your hair for those who never shall retun 
 
 Oh ! sacred Truth, thy triumph ceased a while. 
 
m> 
 
 u- 
 
 
 
 108 
 
 ElTGLISn OBAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 Now haste, Bernardo, haste 1 Bo men to-day, Quirites, or be foi 
 ever elavos. Stay, gaoler stay, and hear my woe. 
 
 My beautiful, my beautiful ! that standcst meekly by, 
 
 With tliy proudly arched and glossy neck and dark and fiery eye, 
 
 Fret not to roam the desert now with all thy wing6d speed. 
 
 Oh, father I wilt thou ask me to return ? Peter, bring the cash- 
 book and a pen. James, can you bring a message for me ? 
 
 That in Three Ways. 
 223. Tlie word that may be either an Adjective, 
 Conjunction, or Eelative. Which of them it is in any 
 case, must be determined by the part it phays in tho 
 sentence. 
 
 Exercise 103. 
 
 That tree must be cut do^vn. The fields belong to that man. 
 You have destroyed the books that I gave you. Report saya 
 that Davidson has made a failure. Come to me at 4 o'clccL,, that 
 I may show you how to do that puzzle that I got for yod. If, 
 then, that friend demand why Brutus rose against Cresar, this ia 
 my answer— not that I loved C^sar less, but that I loved Rome 
 more. 
 
 The boast of heraldry, the pomp of power. 
 And all that beauty, all that wealth e'er gave, 
 
 Await alike the inevitable hour : 
 The paths of glory lead but to the grave. 
 Uneasy lies the head that wears a crown. To be or not to be ?— 
 that is the question. Is this a dagger that I see before me ? 
 
 The evil that men do lives after them ; 
 
 The good is oft interred with their bones ; 
 
 So let it be with Caesar I 
 
 You all did see, that, on the Lupercal, 
 I thrice presented him a kingly crown, 
 Which he did thrice refuse. 
 
 I am no orator, as Brutus is ; 
 
 But, as you know me all, a plain, blunt man, 
 
 That loves his friend ;— and that they know full well 
 
 That gave mo public leave to speak of him. 
 
 But, Only, Since, and Very. 
 
 Exercise 104. 
 
 There is but one. I would go, but am not able. All have fled 
 but me. You are the only man remaining. He has only to call 
 
THE AUSOLUTE PHEASE. 
 
 109 
 
 for me. "We have not met since Wednesday. Since no work can 
 be done, I may go. How long is it since you were here ? Yon 
 are the only director hut Thomas, who has heen hero since last 
 evening. Since you say so, I will believe it. He ran all the way, 
 but was too late. Only return and you will bo forgiven. All are 
 served but me. That is the only horse I have. You are very 
 kind. I have found the very ring that was lost. 
 
 The Absolute Phrase. 
 
 224. A Noun or Pronoun with a participle, quite 
 independent, in construction, of the rest of the sen- 
 tence, is called an Absolute Phrase ; as, SJw having 
 diedf he mourns his loss. 
 
 225. Syntax. — Eule XIX. — The Noun or Pronoun 
 in an absolute phrase is in the Nominative case. 
 
 Exercis'^ t05, 
 
 Columbus having finished his account of his voyage, the sove- 
 reigns sank upon their knees. Thus talking, the old man's shape 
 troubled me. William Penn approaching the Sachems, all the 
 Indians threw down their arms. The king having been slain, 
 the army broke up and the soldiers fled. The carrier having for- 
 gotten some of his commissions, my uncle had to set out for the 
 city by himself. The sbip latterly went on the rocks, the crew 
 not being able to prevent it. God, who art in heaven, we 
 pray to Thee. The matter coming to the ears of the secretary, the 
 conspirators were arrested. They believe him to be the culprit. 
 He became a thief. He died since then. Ah, yes ! he did. 
 
 Call, Seem, Name, Sfc. 
 
 226. Some verbs besides J:o he have a Nominative 
 after them ; as. He is called John. Some are also 
 followed by an Adjective. 
 
 Exercise 106. 
 
 She walks a goddess and she moves a queen. He was called 
 Longshanks. They grew angry. We felt wearied. The child 
 was called Andrew. He was chosen leader. He will turn out a 
 
 -••■. • rni_ -^ 1X7-*1 -3 ^•^«/%(s V/-V1-I l-»nTT/\ rev*r\TVTr\ foil 
 
 Viiiain. iiiey wuru uaiucu TTtiiuciisco. av^-^ nctru- gi-.-nii i-^h^^. 
 She seemed displeased. What is it called ? Yon is the very man 
 who seemed so distressed. Oh, kind sir I help me. Who seeme 
 to be too happy? He. Yours seems good. She feels stronger. 
 
10 
 
 ENGLISH OEAMMAn AND ANALins. 
 
 i-ia 
 
 
 
 Adjectives used as Adverbs. 
 
 227. Sometimes an adjective is used as an adverb* 
 I'ull well he knows. ' 
 
 Exercise 107. 
 
 TliG sun shone bright. The lark sang sweet in the bine skr 
 ; 3 snow fell husjied and silent for throe days. Thoy bowed low 
 . _^ mistg of evening were spreading wide. The wind sonnded 
 
 1 ?"i^l' *l'®, ^^"^y ^^'^^ ^'"^^^' T^o ^^'^^^ sped swift to the 
 '' ' u ^"„ ^^'^ ''^^o^'® ^^^ father's men three days we've fled 
 j ether. How sweet tlie moonlight sleeps upon this bank ! The 
 nts burn blue. Oh mighty Cnesar ! dost thou lie bo low? 
 
 Impersonal Verbs. 
 228. Verbs which have only the Third Person are 
 'ied Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 Exercise 108. 
 
 ■'it rains. It snows. It blows hard. Methonght my dream 
 B lengthened after life. Did you hear how it thundered ? It ia 
 •m to-night. It will thaw before morning. 
 
 Analyze Exercises 101, 102, 103, lOL, 105, 106. 
 
 '7. 7,1 
 
 SUPPLEMENT. 
 
 229. All the difFerent ^m J^ of words in the Endisb 
 
 nguagc have now been considered. 
 
 They are arranged under eight heads, called tho 
 
 igbt Parts of Speech; viz.— 
 
 Noun Adverb 
 
 Y^o^o^n Preposition 
 
 ^^jective Conjunction 
 
 ^®^'" Interjection. 
 
 230. The science which tr^nt a nf nl] fTioo/^ pi««„^« ^r 
 ords both as words simply, and as words combined 
 I sentences, is calle- "English Grammar. 
 
LETTEBS. 
 
 ni 
 
 231. English Grammar is studied in Six Divisions : 
 
 1. Orthography, wliicli teaches how to spell words 
 correctly, and to divide them into syllables. 
 
 2. Pronunciation, which teaches how to pronounce 
 or sound them correctly. 
 
 S. Classification, which teaches how to arrange them 
 in their proper classes. 
 
 4. Inflection, which teaches how to change them, 
 BO as to express number, person, gender, case, timoj 
 etc. 
 
 5. Syntax, which teaches the proper connection of 
 words in a sentence^ and why certain forms and inflec- 
 tions must be used. 
 
 6. Compost ion, which teaches how to express 
 thoughts correctly, neatly, and elegantly. 
 
 To these some add — 
 
 7. Etymology, which teaches the origin of words. 
 Of these seven divisions, only three are treated of 
 
 in the foregoing pages : viz., Classification, Inflection, 
 and Syntax. 
 
 Letters. 
 
 S32. A Language is the whole system of words 
 used by any particular people. The English Lan- 
 guage is the whole system of words used by the people 
 in the British Isles, and by their descendants in the 
 United States of JSTorth America, Australia, New Zea- 
 land, eLc. It is also called the Anglo-Saxon language. 
 The words composing this language are all made from 
 twenty-six letters, called the Alphabet. 
 
 These letters are divided into vowels and conso- 
 nants. 
 
 A Vowel makes a full and complete sound by itself. 
 
 There are seven vowels— (x, e, i, o, u, w, and ?/. 
 
 A Consonant cannot be sounded easily without the 
 iip of a vowel. 
 
 There are nineteen consonants — h, c. 
 
 iieip 
 
 I 
 
 m,n,p,q,ryS, t,v,sc,z. 
 
 f'9ihjyh 
 
112 
 
 ENOLISII OBAMMAH ANIl ANALYSIS. 
 
 t -J 
 
 1 
 
 ft* 
 
 Syllables. 
 
 A vowel may make a word or syllable by itself; 
 a consonant cannot. 
 
 233. A Syllable ie a complete, distinct sound ; as, 
 dof/, or mas in master. 
 
 If a word consists of only one syllable, it is called 
 a Monosyllable ; as, vest If it cousjists of two sylla- 
 bles, it is called a Dissyllable ; as. mvest, vestment. 
 If it consists of three syllables, it ia called a Trisylla- 
 ble ; as, investing, investment. If it consists of more 
 than three syllables, it is called a Polysyllable ; as, 
 in-vGs-ti-ga-tion. 
 
 234. Two vowels coming together in one syllable 
 make a Diphthong ; as, oi in voice, oa in boat. 
 
 Three vowels coming together in one syllable make 
 a Triphthong ; as, eau in heaiity. 
 
 Point out the vowels, consonants, and diphthongs 
 in each of the following words, and divide them into 
 syllables. 
 
 Exercise 109. 
 
 Cat, boy, note, Gase, moist, music, moan, mean, mien, meaning', 
 desuoy, commandment, representation, recoil, mountam, (lissa°- 
 tisfaction, employment, undoubting, monumental, mournful, sin- 
 fulness, foivible, visible, detestable, inconceivable, persistent, 
 misunderstanding, beware, recomm-^ndation, satisfaction, irreli- 
 gious, spontaneous, horrible, arithmetician, poHtical, resuscitate, 
 society, illustration. 
 
 Kinds of Noims. 
 
 235. Nouns a:o divided into Five Classes — Proper, 
 Common, Abstract, Collective, and Verbal. 
 
 1st. A Proper noun is a name tl • belongs to one 
 person or thing, and distinguislies it i'rom all others ; 
 as, James Smith, London, Thames. A proper noun 
 always begins with a capital letter. 
 
 2nd. A Common noun is a name that belongs to 
 every individual in a whole clas^ ; as, doj, river j %wn, 
 maUf tree. 
 
•fADLES OF QENDEE. 
 
 118 
 
 Ord. An Abstract notm is a name derived from 
 Boino quality or action j as, blacknesSy height^ cruelty, 
 wisdom. 
 
 4tli. A Collective noun is a name given to a group 
 
 or collection of persons or things ; as, crowds jloch^ 
 
 committee. 
 
 It soniotiraoa takes a singular verb and sometimes a plural 
 verb, aocordin{? as the whole group or the iuJividiials of the group 
 are thought of. When the verb is Bingular the nou* is neuter. 
 
 6th. A Verbal noun is a present participle used 
 as a noun ; as, reading, writing. 
 To what classes do the following nouns ])elong ? — 
 
 Exercise 110. 
 
 Stone, dog, tree, England, flock, tea, Clyde, Parif/, street, 
 whiteness, reading, gold, multitude, Africa, Glasgow, strength, 
 penny, taste, fleet, ship, goodness, majesty, spelling, smith, ma- 
 son, Henry, Berlin, Benlomoud, joy, covey, hearing, army, Peter, 
 Jamaica, county. 
 
 TaWes of Gender. 
 
 236. The Gender of nouns is distinguished in i je 
 ways : — 
 
 1st. By distinct words for the masculine and femi- 
 nine. 
 
 1 •! 
 
 Masculine, 
 
 Fembdne. 
 
 Masculine* 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 ' H 
 
 Bachelor 
 
 maid 
 
 Sir 
 
 madam 
 
 S 
 
 Beau 
 
 belle 
 
 Son 
 
 daughter 
 
 Hj 
 
 Boy 
 
 girl 
 
 Tutor 
 
 governess 
 
 ' fl[ 
 
 Brother 
 
 sister 
 
 Uncle 
 
 aunt 
 
 ^H 
 
 Earl 
 
 countess 
 
 Wizard 
 
 witch 
 
 ^1 
 
 Father 
 
 mother 
 
 Boar 
 
 BOW 
 
 ^1 
 
 Friar 
 
 nun 
 
 Buck 
 
 doe 
 
 .. ^1 
 
 Gentleman 
 
 lady 
 
 Bull 
 
 fcOW 
 
 ■ ss 
 
 Governor 
 
 matron 
 
 Bullock, ox, steer 
 
 heifer 
 
 BB 
 
 Husband 
 
 wife 
 
 Cock 
 
 hen 
 
 ^s 
 
 King 
 
 queen 
 
 Colt 
 
 filly 
 
 ^s 
 
 Lad 
 
 lass 
 
 Drake 
 
 duck 
 
 H| 
 
 Lord 
 
 lady 
 
 Gander 
 
 goose 
 
 ' 1 
 
 Man 
 
 woman 
 
 Hart 
 
 roe 
 
 ^1 
 
 Master 
 
 mistress 
 
 Horse 
 
 mare 
 
 ■■ 
 
 Nephew 
 
 niece 
 
 Earn 
 
 ewe 
 
 ^1 
 
 Papft 
 
 mamma 
 
 Stag 
 
 hind 
 
 Z 
 
 
114 
 
 ENGLISH OEAMMAE AND jLKTALTSIS. 
 
 if . 
 
 2nd. Bj a differenco in termination ; as — 
 
 Abbot 
 
 Actor 
 
 Author 
 
 Baron 
 
 Bride^oom 
 
 Benefactor 
 
 abbess 
 
 actress 
 
 authoress 
 
 baroness 
 
 bride 
 
 benefactress 
 
 3rd. By adding a word ; ae — 
 
 Czar 
 
 Duke 
 
 Emperor 
 
 Hero 
 
 Marquis 
 
 Widower, etc. 
 
 .ISfrtn-servant matflf-servaat 
 Coc/c-sparrow ?je«-sparrow 
 
 J/^-bear 
 Pea-coc7c 
 
 czarinft 
 
 duchesa 
 
 empress 
 
 heroine 
 
 marchionesg 
 
 ■widow, etc, 
 
 "pea-hen 
 
 Formation of Plural. 
 
 237. 1 The plural is generally formed by adding s 
 to the singular ; as, pc?2, pens. 
 
 2. Nouns whose singulars end in o', or, sh, and ch 
 soft, add es for tlie plurals; as, lass, lasses ; fox, foxes ; 
 dish, dishes ; church, churches. 
 
 3. Nouns in o, preceded by a consonant, add es ; ajs 
 hero, heroes. 
 
 But canto, grotto, folio, and some others take s only. 
 
 4. Nouns in y, preceded by a consonant or tlie 
 vowel tc, change y into i, and add es; as, dttty, duties; 
 sohloquy, soliloquies. All others add s; as, loy, Iot/s. 
 
 5. Most nouns in/ or fe change/ or /e into v, and 
 add es ; as, leaf, leaves. 
 
 But grief stuff, turf, hoofffe, muff, etc., take s only. 
 
 G. Some nouns are alike in both numbers ; as, deer, 
 isheep, swine, dozen, etc. News and alms a^e generally 
 singular. ^ 
 
 Singular, 
 
 Slan 
 
 Foot 
 
 Tooth 
 
 Goose 
 
 Mouse 
 
 Ox 
 
 Child 
 
 Plural. 
 
 men 
 
 feei 
 
 teeth 
 
 geese 
 
 mice 
 
 oxen 
 
 children 
 
 Singular. 
 Brother 
 Cow 
 Die 
 Fish 
 Genius 
 Pea 
 Penny 
 
 Plural. 
 brothers, or brethren 
 cows ,, Idne 
 dies „ dice 
 
 fish „ fishes 
 
 geniuses „ genii 
 V<^^^ ,, pease 
 pennies ,, penco 
 
 Father-in-law, fatl.iers-in-law ; ' Court-martial, courts-martial; 
 Uousin-gerinan, cousms-german; Aide-de-camp, aides-de-camp; 
 esc. etc. 
 
KIITDS OF iLDJECTrVES. 
 
 115 
 
 nna 
 
 ;hesa 
 
 presa 
 
 oine 
 
 rchionesH 
 
 low, etc, 
 
 j-bear 
 i-lien 
 
 dding s 
 
 and cJi 
 , foxes; 
 
 es ; apfi 
 
 or the 
 
 duties; 
 loys. 
 V, and 
 
 ^, deer, 
 lerally 
 
 ■al. 
 
 ircthren 
 
 ine 
 
 ice 
 
 shes 
 
 enii 
 
 case 
 
 enco 
 
 iiiial ; 
 
 camp; 
 
 Form the plurals of the following words : — • 
 
 Exercise HI. 
 
 Book, hat, knife, hero, match, fish, box, hoof, party, day, goose, 
 pea, news, folio, deer, grouse, sister-in-law, foot, paper, rope, life, 
 turf, child, die, brother, calf, chimney, cargo, rush, motto, oglio, 
 penny, louse. 
 
 Kinds of Adjectives. 
 
 238. There are four classes of Adjectives : Proper, 
 Common, Numeral, and Distinguishing. 
 
 1. Proper Adjectives are formed from proper nouns ; 
 as, English, French. 
 
 2. Common Adjectives express qualities ; as, good, 
 wise. 
 
 3. Numeral Adjectives, or Adjectives of Cluantity, 
 are divided into — 
 
 Defiuite Numerals j as, 
 
 one, five, forty, both, etc. 
 
 Indefinite „ as, 
 
 all, some, several, many, etc. 
 
 as, 
 each, every, either, neither. 
 
 4. Distinguishing Adjectives : as, 
 
 the, this, that, etc. 
 
 Distributive 
 
 >» 
 
 » 
 
 239. Common Adjectives have three degrees of com- 
 parison, as given at No. 41. Besides being compared 
 as already pointed out, many adjectives are compared 
 by prefixing the adverbs more, most ; less, least : as, 
 common, more common, most common ; or, less com- 
 mon, least common. 
 
 Tell to what classes of Adjectives the following 
 belong : — 
 
 Exercise 112. 
 
 British, holy, ninety, every, just, American, t ?e, several,, 
 whole, Indian, 1866, fifty, both, many, those, great, red, Scottish,, 
 none, yon, happy, immeasurable, supreme, an, Irish, African, 
 true, beautiful, fourth, twentieth, merciful, black, the, *a, one, 
 
 
 I 2 
 
116 
 
 E^^OLISU OltAMMAIi A.^D AlTALTSia. 
 
 
 i*t* 
 
 Phrases, ^e. 
 
 240. Such phrases as, as far as, as it ell as, as if, so 
 that, etc., are called Conjunctional Phrases. Thev 
 have, however^ been parsed in single words in Exer- 
 cises 79, 87, 89. 
 
 241. Some conjunctions are used in pairs; as, 
 Mther — or, neither — nor, whether — or, both — and, 
 though — yet, etc. They are called Correspondent 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 243. When, where, whence, while, why, whether, 
 wherever, wherely, wherein, etc., are called Conjunctive 
 Adverbs when they connect Clauses. As their gram- 
 matical function is to connect Clauses, they have been 
 parsed simply as Conjunctions in Exercises 87, 88. 
 
 243. At 'present, in vain, at length, in general, at last, 
 in fine, etc., are called Adverbial Phrases, since they 
 have, when combined, the force of adverbs. Each 
 word may be parsed by itself. 
 
 244. When, where, why, whence, how, etc., when 
 used in asking questions receive the name of Inter- 
 rogative Adverbs. 
 
 245. According to, out of, instead of, alon^ with, etc., 
 are Prepositional Phrases; but they may also be 
 parsed in single words. 
 
 FALSE SYNTAX. 
 
 Correct the false syntax in the following sen- 
 tences : — 
 
 Exercise 113. 
 
 Them are the vegetables I like. Him being on deck we gava 
 three cheers. The bishop's of London's charge gave great 
 ofiFence. The bishop's of London charge gave great offence. 
 Peter's? John's, and Andrew's occupation was that of fisherman. 
 
 Grey hairs are death's blossoms. He upholds Englands glory. 
 
m 
 
 FALSE ST^.AX. 
 
 117 
 
 sen- 
 
 He had the greatest reason to love they who had most injured 
 him. They who had most injured him he had most reason to 
 love. He invited my brother and I to dine with him. He is the 
 etrongest of the two, but not the wisest. He finds it more simpler 
 (o take your plan. You had scarce gone when he arrived. These 
 sort of people should be avoided. Are each of these boys ready f 
 Either of you are good enough. Hand me them slates. Did you 
 buy them pens ? Those kind of coals are bad. He shot a owl. 
 Do they consider it a honour ? Many an man fell. The com- 
 mittee was divided in its opinions. Every man in the society, 
 whatever be their circumstances, must pay their share. The 
 crowd was so great that the police could not disperse them. You 
 are the captain, not me. Love and friendship is refreshing. 
 You and me can try to sell it. Him and me are the worst. He 
 and I we know. Agnes or Anne will give us their company. 
 Neither the king nor his minister will trouble themselves. Eacli 
 should bring their books with them. Look at them blossoms on, 
 the apple-trees. That is the beggar which knocked at our door. 
 The shepherds killed the fox who killed the poultry. Send tha 
 child who you got the book from. Thinks I to myself. This will 
 not last long. There is as much real religion and morality in 
 this country as in any other. Wisdom, virtue, happiness dwells 
 with the golden mediocrity. Neither you nor I are concerned. 
 Let thou or I the battle try. Esteeming themselves wise, they 
 became fools. Travellers have often mistook the way. Who sung 
 the song ? Her. The cat sprung out. He arrived at Liverpool, 
 and from thence he went to London. He did not say nothing. 
 Can your father not do no work ? Nobody can say that none ol 
 us did it. Let the business go on whether I am there or no. I 
 did not get no time to give you a visit. Neither tliou nor I are 
 able to come. She is as good as him. Who goes there ? Me. He 
 that Cometh unto me I will in nowise cast out. You are a greater 
 loser than me. He is much taller than her. Who can write a 
 letter ? Her. The train of our ideas are often interrupted. Don't 
 he know ? She don't know. It is not fit for such as us to sit 
 with the rulers of the land. It is me. Who does he speak to? 
 He was the most noblest fellow I ever met. This is John Jones 
 his mark. Neither he nor she were there. Who done this ? I 
 seen him. It was him. Do you know who you are to go to ? I 
 have beared it said. He has went away. Between you and I, I 
 don't believe it. Apples will be plenty this year. You are a 
 much older man than me. Who did they tell it to ? I cannot' 
 by no means pennit it. I expected to have dined with you last 
 week. The meeting were numerously attended. A herd of cattle 
 peacefully grazin.fo; afford a plcp.sing sight. I shall pay, whether I 
 
 oft*"!'' n*" ^'^ 'W\trk ciinli-n 9 H^irn 'Rvf>l"Tro'"r fo tlipir foofo 
 
I 
 
 118 E2;rGLISH GBAMMAE AlfD ANALYSIS. 
 
 PKOMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 To be parsed syntactically, and analyzed. 
 
 ihl^'tF '^^^ St '*' ^"*^^'' Exercise and temperance strenff- 
 
 abou To'ta'c^^;- f''^*-''^^^ '''''''''' ^^° be 'gained wiSt 
 laoour. 10 practise virtue is the sure way to love it. Business 
 
 f mand of nature, of reason, and of God. A friend cannot be 
 
 knovvn m prosperity, and an enemy cannot be hidden in adversity 
 
 ^e^Zm^lhlZ^^^ J'^^*^^^' a^d honour 
 
 v!f,f V^ r r^y.*^^* ^^^ ^^ *ears, shall reap in joy. llend 
 your heart, and not your garments. The true consiStionTs 
 
 fsfrawtin'f ^''KT'- ^^^.^^P^^P^ aredetermined tTqua^r : 
 
 and faTr L^f 1*^'' T^^'^^?- ^P^^ y^""' ^^P^' ye wonderfu 
 . and Ian. Soft is the strain when zephyr gently blows and thA 
 
 smooth stream in smoother numbers flows. ^ The labour oTyelra 
 
 nnll''' 'T^'^'"'^. ^' ^ °^"^P^^*^ reformation. A ?mffS 
 unbo oms freely, advises justly, assists readily, adventu I bold y 
 
 flhnvte^'T'-^^fr"^^ ^y name, held out to ne lis cold' 
 Sned 1nd'a taj;' fin'.T °f /^^ognition. The door was suddenly 
 
 tlipv HnWn ,P,', ^^V'/, '^.^^^ ^ow, are honourable men. How 
 tney tinkle, tmlde, tinkle, in the icv air nf -,ia]i+» ^^ui^ n i 
 that over-sririnlHp nil +i,i i ^^J aii oi .iigiit! while the stars 
 
 lum o\ei sprinJile all the heavens, seem to twinkle with a rrvs 
 
 S£:ffl; of :;.St ^l^e^ofaXr "'"-■ -^^ 
 
 The shades of night were falling fast. 
 
 As through an Alpine village passed 
 
 A youth, who bore, 'mid snow and ice, 
 
 A banner with this strange device— Excelsior I 
 Sweet was the sound, when oft, at eveninr^'s close 
 Up yonder hill the village murmur rose ° '' 
 
 There as I passed, with careless step and slow, 
 The miuglmg notes came softened from below! 
 Cradled in the field, he was to the last hour the darling of tha 
 
 fs^ru'4t;^!?i^^^ -j^p - "- cabiret!tttr'f:4Sk 
 
 .o.^o„ » i«,^ui. xne victoriouB veteran glittered with 
 
PEOMISCUOTJS EXEECISES. 
 
 119 
 
 his gains ; and the capital, gorgeous with the spoils of art, be- 
 came the miniature metropolis of the universe. 
 
 The isles of Greece, the isles of Greece, 
 Where burning Sappho loved and sung ; 
 
 Where grew the arts of war and peace ; 
 Where Delos rose and Phoebus sprung — 
 
 Eternal summer gilds them yet ; 
 
 But all, except their sun, is set. 
 
 Is this a dagger that I see before me, 
 The handle toward my hand? Come, let 
 Me clutch thee. 
 
 His was one of the few, the immortal names that were not bom 
 to die. 
 
 A time there was, ere England's griefs began, 
 When every rood of ground maintained its man. 
 
 Not enjoyment, and not sorrow, 
 Is our destined ei .1 or way. 
 
 The atrocious crime of being a young man, which the honour- 
 able gentleman has, with such spirit and decency, charged upon 
 me, 1 shall neither attempt to palliate nor deny ; but content my- 
 self with wishing that I may be one of those whose follies may 
 cease with their youth, and not of those who continue ignorant, 
 in spite of age and experience. I am at liberty, like any other 
 man, to use my own language. They knew well that if he was 
 lavish of them, he was prodigal of himself; and that, if he exposed 
 them to peril, he repaid them with plunder. His fah, like his life, 
 baffled all speculation. Great actions and striking occurrences, 
 having excited a temporary admiration, often pass away and are 
 forgotten, because they leave no lasting results affecting the wel- 
 fare of communities. If the. author of the Irish Melodies had 
 ever had a little isle so much his own as I have possessed, he 
 might not have found it so sweet as the song anticipates. 
 
 He did not feel the driver's whip nor the burning heat of day, 
 Tor death had illumined the land of sleep, and his lifeless bodj 
 
 lay 
 A worn-out fetter, that the soul had broken and thrown away. 
 
 She moulds with care a spirit rare, half human, half divine, 
 And cries exulting, " Who can make a gentleman like mine ?" 
 
 All worldly shapes shall melt in gloom, 
 
 The sun himself must die, 
 Before this mortal shall assume 
 
 Ti- : i«i:i._ 
 
120 ENGLISn GEAMMAE AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 arro?ant «'^ *^' ^^'^' ^°^ '*°°^ «^^" the brave. I am mon. 
 cSsed? NnfTfr* ^^^ '^^^" ^ '''''' ^^^""^ God hath not 
 to Deak uILhv'''''' ""'' ^^'g«««*l^y«elf unknown. From peak 
 to peak, the ratthng crags among, leaps the live thunder. 
 
 The way was long, the wind was cold, 
 Ihe minstrel was infirm and old ; 
 His Avithered cheek and tresses gray 
 Seemed to have known a better day. 
 The harp— his sole remaining joy- 
 Was carried by an orphan boy. 
 
 Who sang of anciejit chivalry. 
 
 Our bosoms we'll bare for the glorious strife. 
 sua rose all tlieir boats were manned and armed. 
 
 As soon as the 
 
 The quality of mercy is not strain'd : 
 It droppeth as the gentle rain from heaven 
 ?/iS" *^\P^ce beneath: it is twice bless'd: 
 It blesseth him that gives, and him that takes. 
 
 Endowed with a great command over herself, Queen Elizabpth 
 soon obtamed an uncontrolled ascendancy ovei hrLple and 
 wmle she merited their esteem by her real viviZl S^^if ' ' 
 gaged their affection by her pretended o^es. ' '^" '^'' '°* 
 
 'Tis pleasant by the cheerful fire to hear 
 Of tempests, and the dangers of the deep. 
 And pause at times, and feel that we are safe • 
 Ihen listen to the perilous tale again, ' 
 
 And, with an eager and suspended aoul. 
 Woo terror to delight us. 
 
 When questioned, he declared them to be soldiers. In their 
 statements, whom do they represent me to be ? Eemember that 
 
 tation wht 'h' ^ '' ""'''' ^'''^ ^°^^^^ '^'^^ -^ rX"?i 'in * 
 ta ion which has been so courteously sent. Attend, thou son of 
 earth, to my instructions. Let them laugh who win Wern hp in 
 confess his fault, he would be forgiven. 'l Tn'endei laYt ye r to 
 have visited you Loved and admired by his friends, he fell aTacrf' 
 
 one hnn?'^r '*' ""f''^'''^ • ^^'-^ ''^"^^"^ '^^ ^^' report occipicd 
 one hour. Generally speaking it is injurious to our race To 
 
 miles a day. He bought a log of wood 16 feet long and * yard 
 
 Icttu^olT^"" *M ^''"* ^^1'* ^^^'^^^^ 1^« ^^^ "ot another 
 woildto conquer. Moses was the meekest of men. To attack 
 
 ing indeed, but it is C\^ 
 
 :ting \, 
 
 ith Ghadows. 
 
PE0MISCTJ0U8 EXEnClSEB. 
 
 121 
 
 I am mon- 
 cl hath not 
 From peak 
 ler. 
 
 loon as the 
 
 * 
 
 ces. 
 
 Elizabeth 
 iople, and, 
 le also en- 
 
 In their 
 iber, that 
 
 the invi- 
 ou son of 
 ere he to 
 ; year to 
 1 a sacri- 
 occnjiicd 
 ace. To 
 led forty 
 d i yard 
 
 another 
 ?o attack 
 lie jSght- 
 
 Like the dew on the mountain, 
 
 Like the foam on the river, 
 Like the bubble on the fountain. 
 
 Thou art gone, and for ever. 
 
 They could not find a house large enough. Over is not under. 
 Once is too often. An i/ ruins the case. Ah ! is an interjection. 
 God said, Let there be light, and there was light. He thinks him- 
 self a gentleman. I felt the pulse beat. They live near us. We 
 met near the river. Whether he or his brother will go, I cannot 
 tell. It rains, and the wind is never weary. At once his eye 
 grew wild. Inasmuch us ye did it unto one of these, ye did it 
 unto Me. Aroused by Gelert's dying yell, some slumberer wakened 
 nigh. There are two of us present. 
 
 Yet here at nights I sit. 
 Beading the Book, with Donald at my side ; 
 And stooping, with the Book upon my knee, 
 I sometimes gaze in Donald's patient eyes — 
 So sad, so human, though he cannot speak— 
 And think he knows that Willie is at peace, 
 Far, far away beyond the norland hills. 
 Beyond the silence of the untrodden snow. 
 
 To the left of the Athenians was a low chain of hills, clothed 
 with trees : to their right, a torrent : their front was long, for to 
 render it more imposing in extent, and to prevent being out-flanked 
 by the Persian numbers, the centre ranks were left weak and 
 shallow, but on either wing the troops were drawn up more solidly 
 and strong. 
 
 These are Thy glorious works, Parent of good I • 
 
 Almighty ! Thine this universal frame. 
 
 Thus wondrous fair ; Thyself how wondrous then 
 
 Unspeakable ! who sitt'st above these heavens. 
 
 To us invisible or dimly seen 
 
 In these Thy lowest works ; yet these declare 
 
 Thy goodness beyond thought, and power divine. 
 
 Tho line of the gentle Cowper, •' God made the country, and 
 man made the town," has passed into a proverb. At present we 
 fly from York or Exeter to London by the light of a single wiutei'a 
 day. There is a gulf betwixt us. 
 
 To be or not to be ? — that is the question : — 
 
 Whether 'tis nobler, in the mind, to snflfer 
 
 The stings and arrows of outrageous fortune ; 
 
 Or to take arms against a sea of troubles. 
 
 And, by opposing, end them ?— To die ? — to sleep, — 
 
122 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND ANALYSIS. 
 
 
 h ^ 
 
 No moro ;— and, by a sleep, to cay w« end 
 
 The heart-acho, and the thousand natural shocks 
 
 That flesh is heir to. 
 
 It is lon^ by ten feet. It i. ten feet long. The cnnalis twenty 
 yards broad at tlmt point. This the worth of ten sliillinRs. Thi? 
 IS woi;th ten sbillings This is worthy of ten Bhillings. Your 
 
 590? 'I T? ^v ?• ^^t ^°* ^°^"^ ^'^^b- The monument is 
 120 teet high. Yet much remains to conquer still : peace hath 
 her victories not loss renowned than war. The time, it is to be 
 hoped IS gone by, when any defence would be necessnry of the 
 liberty of the press.' as one of the securities against corrupt or 
 tyrannical government. A good book is the precious life-blood of 
 a master-spirit embalmed and treasured up on purpose to a life 
 beyond hfe The worth of a State, in the long run7is the worth 
 
 [nVJi^.if n^fr- ' '^^7f ^"^ ^* '. ^^^ a State which postpones the 
 interests of their mental expansion and elevation, to a little more 
 of administrative skill, or of that semblance of it which pract-'ce 
 gives, in the details of business; a State which dwarfs its men in 
 Older that they may bo more docile instruments in its hands even 
 for beneficial purposes-mil find that with small men no gi-eat 
 thing can really he accomplished ; and that the perfection o^ 
 machinery to which it has sacrificed everything, w 11 in the end 
 avail It nothing, for want of the vital power which, in ocdei tJiat 
 the machme might work more smoothly, it has preferred to banish. 
 
 There's not a flower on all the hills : the frost is on the pane : 
 
 . \ only wish to live till the snow-drops come n^ain • 
 I wish the snow would melt, and the sun come out on high. 
 1 long to see a flower so, before the day I die. 
 
 Howe'er it be, it seems to me, 
 'Tis only noble to bo good. 
 Kind words are more than coronets. 
 And simple faith than Norman blood. 
 
 There is some soul of goodness in things evil. 
 Would men observingly distil it out. 
 
 Were I but capable of interpreting to the world one half the great 
 thoughts ard noble feelings which are buried in her gi-ave, I should 
 be the meainmof a greater benefit to it, than h ever likely to 
 
 ?v Ifi'Tf?* '''•^' *,^i ^.'^'^ ""'''^^^ unprompted and unassisted 
 by her all but unrivalled wisdom. 
 
 I 
 
I 
 
 THE ANALYTICAL 1\ HOD 
 OF TEACHINO ENGLISH Oiti^MMAB. 
 
 (Extracted from the " Museum,^' September, 1867.) 
 
 We propose briefly to consider the Analytical Method of Teachiug 
 English Grammar. The ordinary method employed is a synthe- 
 tical one. The synthetical method commences with the word, 
 |nd having shown how many and what are the different lands of 
 l\rordg, or parts of speech, then proceeds to explain how these 
 words are modified or inflected, and how they are arranged to 
 form sentences, so as to express thought. The analytical method 
 begins with the sentence, as the expression of a though*, examines 
 the parts into which the sentence is divisible, and the relations 
 between these parts, and then arrives at the consideration of the 
 words of which they are made up. 
 
 Which of tliese methods should be adopted in the teaching of 
 English grammar ? We answer, neither exclusively ; the analy- 
 tical method should be employed for imparting the first knowledge 
 of the subject, and especially for bringing out its general princi- 
 ples ; and the synthetical method is proper for a more detailed 
 subsequent course, and for storing up in the memory the facts 
 and rules of the subject. As Archbishop Whately has well ex- 
 pressed it, — " The synthetical form of teaching is indeed sufii- 
 ciently interesting to one who has made considerable progress in 
 a; v study ; and being more concise, regular, and systema';ic, is 
 the form in which our knowledge naturally arranges itself in the 
 mind, and is retained by the memory ; but the analytical is the 
 more interesting, easy, and natural kind of introduction, as being 
 the form in vhich the first invention or discovery of any kind of 
 Bystem must originally have taken place." 
 
 ♦ **•«» 
 
 Neither method, as we have already observed, should be used 
 exclusively. Upon this point we quote the following from Sir 
 William Hamilton's Lectures on Mcftaphysics : — "Analysis and 
 synthesis, lliough commonly treated as two different methods, 
 are, if p 'operly understood, only the two necessary parts of the 
 same m ihod. Each is the relative and the correlative of the 
 other. Analysis, without a subsequent synthesis, is incomplete ; 
 it is a mean cut oiT from its end. Synthesis, witliout a previous 
 analysis, is baseless ; for synthesis receives from analysis the 
 elements which it rccomposes." 
 
 * * * * It * 
 
 Two principal objections have been made to the use of the 
 ftnaiytical method, as the basis of a first course of instruction in 
 
 y 
 
124 
 
 
 Fnf,'!ish grammar. In the flr^t plnco, it hrtn hr^n tiTffed that if 
 r.uxog together two difTercnt tnibjcoty, viii., ui,ui,;,i3 o: Bc-atcucea, 
 nml what is ordinarily uuilerstood by the term grammar, and thus 
 distracts the attention of the child, by requiring him to learn two 
 things at the same time. This would be a very serious objection 
 If there were any valid foundatioL for it. Our answer is eimpl- 
 that those who look upon anal, sis of sentences and ordinai-y 
 grammar as two separate and independent subjects are altogether 
 in the wrong. They form, wLm rightly considered, but one 
 whole; so that it is impossible to teach the latter, without at 
 least implicitly and blindly recogi ising the principles and facts 
 winch it )s in the province of thei former to investigate. Does 
 not, for instance, a comprehension of the meaning of such terms 
 as nominative case and objective case, necessarily involve an un- 
 derstanding of what is meant by the subject and object of a 
 sentence, although the words subject and object may never have 
 been used by the pupil ? Does not, again, a comprehension 
 ot the office of the adverb, as. expressing the time, place, 
 &c., of the action indicated by tha verb, necessitate also a know- 
 ledge of what IS intended, when we speak of the extension of the 
 predicate ? And can the pupil pgssibly tell what noun or pro- 
 noun the finite verb agrees with, unless ho is able to discover the 
 subject of that verb ? In fact, it is impossible to parse without 
 imphcitly analysing. This objection then falls to the ground. 
 
 But, in the next place, we are told the analytical method 
 burdens the memory of the pupil with an additional set of 
 technical terms ; the study of grammar already involves the learn- 
 ing of a large number of technical terms, and it will be by no 
 means a good plan to add to this difficulty b^ the introduction of 
 new ones. It is a sufficient answer to this objection to point out 
 how very small is the number of new technical terms introduced. 
 They might almost he counted on the fingers ; we have— simple, 
 complex, compound, subject, predicate, object, direct, indirect, 
 enlargement, extension, principal, subordinate, co-ordinate. 
 Thepe are positively all that can be considered as essential. 
 And it must be further observed that these words serve, Hke all 
 techmcal terms, to fix and give precision to the ideas which they 
 represent, and therefore render the acquisition and retaining of 
 the subject so much the easier, and the knowledge of it so much 
 the more thorough and lasting. This is indeed ncohing but the 
 object and i..se of all technical terms. So that the knowledge of 
 the prmciples of analysis being, as we have shown abo\j, neces- 
 sary for the study of the remaining portions of grammar, these 
 technical terms must simply be looked upon as so many aids ia 
 the attainment of such knowledge. 
 
 Butlej: & Timuer, The Selwood Triuting Works, From*, anJ London, 
 
rged that 11' 
 
 u" Bt'UtcUCOS, 
 
 lar, and tlma 
 to learn two 
 >us objection 
 er ia eimpH 
 nd ordinai-y 
 •e altogether 
 id, but one 
 , without at 
 es and facts 
 gate. Does 
 
 such terms 
 volve an un- 
 
 obiect of a 
 ■ never have 
 nprehension 
 ime, place, 
 ilso a know- 
 ision of the 
 oun or pro- 
 discover the 
 rse without 
 » ground, 
 cal method 
 3nal set of 
 IS the learn- 
 11 be by no 
 oduction of 
 to point out 
 introduced. 
 ^e — simple, 
 5t, indirect, 
 50-ordinate, 
 I essential. 
 :ve, like all 
 which they 
 etaining of 
 it so much 
 Qg but the 
 owledge of 
 o\ J, neces- 
 imar, these 
 iuy aids in 
 
 idon,